Miller Dynasty 350
Welding Equipment · 52 Q&As

Miller Dynasty 350

Ask AI

— answers from the official manual

Answers from the official manual.

Common questions

Common Questions

52 total
1

What maintenance does the Dynasty 350 require?

The manual covers maintenance procedures in Section 8, including blowing out the inside of the unit (page 66) and coolant maintenance (page 66). Troubleshooting guidance is also provided in Section 8-4 (page 67). Only qualified persons should perform maintenance and repairs on the unit. (Page 66)

2

What is the maximum open-circuit voltage on the Dynasty 350?

The maximum open-circuit DC voltage (Uo) is 75 volts when in Stick mode with normal open-circuit voltage selected. A low open-circuit voltage of 10–15 volts is present while in TIG Lift Arc mode or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected. (Page 12)

3

What maintenance should I perform on the inside of the Dynasty 350?

The manual covers blowing out the inside of the unit in Section 8-2 and coolant maintenance in Section 8-3. These procedures are detailed in the Maintenance and Troubleshooting section starting on page 66.

4

What safety precautions should I follow to reduce EMF exposure while welding?

Keep cables close together by twisting, taping, or using a cable cover, and do not place your body between welding cables. Keep your head and trunk as far from the equipment as possible, and connect the work clamp to the workpiece as close to the weld as possible. Do not coil or drape cables around your body, and do not weld while carrying the welding power source. (Page 12)

5

Can I use the Dynasty 350 if I have a pacemaker or other implanted medical device?

Wearers of pacemakers and other implanted medical devices should keep away from arc welding operations. Implanted medical device wearers should consult their doctor and the device manufacturer before going near arc welding, spot welding, gouging, plasma arc cutting, or induction heating operations. (Page 10)

6

What should I do if overheating occurs on the Dynasty 350?

Allow a cooling period and follow the rated duty cycle to prevent overheating. You should reduce current or reduce the duty cycle before starting to weld again. Do not block or filter the airflow to the unit. (Page 11)

Show 46 more questions

What is the rated output and duty cycle of the Dynasty 350?

What is the maximum open-circuit voltage (OCV) on the Dynasty 350?

What welding processes does the Dynasty 350 support?

What safety gear should I wear when operating the Dynasty 350?

Can the Dynasty 350 be used by people with pacemakers or other implanted medical devices?

How do I minimize EMF exposure when using the Dynasty 350?

What input voltages does the Dynasty 350 accept?

What is the maximum amperage output for the Dynasty 350 welder?

What should I do before installing or servicing the welder?

What is the maximum open-circuit voltage (OCV) for the Dynasty 350?

How do I safely handle compressed gas cylinders used with this welder?

What duty cycle rating does the Dynasty 350 have?

What precautions should I take regarding fumes and gases when welding?

How should I protect myself from electric shock when using this welder?

What safety equipment should I wear when welding?

Where is the serial number and rating label located on the Dynasty 350?

What input voltages does the Dynasty 350 support?

How do I safely disconnect and service the Dynasty 350?

What precautions should I take when working with high-frequency devices?

How should I handle TIG tungsten electrode shaping?

How do I safely dispose of coolant used in the welder?

What safety guidelines should I follow when using stick welding (SMAW)?

How do I ensure correct cable placement to prevent electric shock?

Why is it important to use a DC constant voltage wire welder instead of AC in some conditions?

How should I check if my welder's input power is correctly grounded?

What are key steps for preventing interference issues with welding equipment?

How do I reset the Dynasty 350 to factory default settings?

Is there significant voltage present inside the machine after I turn it off?

Is it safe to touch internal parts immediately after turning off the Dynasty 350?

What should I know about connecting input power for the 350 model?

What does the TIG HF Impulse/Lift-Arc connection do on the Dynasty 350?

What voltage and phase options are available for the Dynasty 350?

What are the main safety precautions I need to read before using this welder?

Where should I locate the serial number and rating label on my Dynasty 350?

How do I connect a cooler to my Dynasty 350?

What does the 28-pin receptacle on the Dynasty 350 do?

How do I select the correct cable size for my Dynasty 350?

What are the weld output terminal options and how do I select the correct cable size?

How do I connect the gas for TIG welding on the Dynasty 350?

Are there specific safety standards that the Dynasty 350 complies with?

How do I properly select a location for my Dynasty 350?

What gas connections does the Dynasty 350 require for TIG welding?

Are there European safety certifications for the Dynasty 350?

What are the voltage requirements for the Dynasty 350 welder?

What safety hazards should I be aware of before using the Dynasty 350?

What should I consider when selecting a location for my Dynasty 350?

Full Manual

136 pages
Page 1

|Visit our website at www.MillerWelds.com

| |---|

![image 1](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile1.png)

![image 2](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile2.png)

OM-216 869U 2010−08

Processes

TIG (GTAW) Welding

![image 3](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile3.png)

Stick (SMAW) Welding

![image 4](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile4.png)

Description

![image 5](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile5.png)

![image 6](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile6.png)

![image 7](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile7.png)

![image 8](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile8.png)

208/575 Volt Models W/Auto-Line

380/575 Volt Three-Phase W/Auto-Line (CE)

Arc Welding Power Source

Dynasty 350, 700

Maxstar 350, 700

Page 2

#### Including Optional Cart And Cooler CE And Non-CE Models

File: TIG (GTAW)

![image 9](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile9.png)

From Miller to You

Thank you and congratulations on choosing Miller. Now you can get the job done and get it done right. We know you don’t have time to do it any other way.

That’s why when Niels Miller first started building arc welders in 1929, he made sure his products offered long-lasting value and superior quality. Like you, his customers couldn’t afford anything less. Miller products had to be more than the best they could be. They had to be the best you could buy.

Today, the people that build and sell Miller products continue the tradition. They’re just as committed to providing equipment and service that meets the high standards of quality and value established in 1929. This Owner’s Manual is designed to help you get the most out of your Miller products. Please take time to read the Safety precautions. They will help you protect yourself against potential hazards on the worksite.

We’ve made installation and operation quick and easy. With Miller you can count on years of reliable service with proper maintenance. And if for some reason the unit needs repair, there’s a Troubleshooting section that will help you figure out what the problem is. The parts list will then help you to decide the exact part you may need to fix the problem. Warranty and service information for your particular model are also provided.

| | |---| | |

Miller is the first welding equipment manufacturer in the U.S.A. to be registered to the ISO 9001 Quality System Standard.

![image 10](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile10.png)

Miller Electric manufactures a full line of welders and welding related equipment. For information on other quality Miller products, contact your local Miller distributor to receive the latest full line catalog or individual specification sheets. To locate your nearest distributor or service agency call 1-800-4-A-Miller, or visit us at www.MillerWelds.com on the web.

Mil_Thank 2009−09

|![image 11](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile11.png)

Working as hard as you do − every power source from Miller is backed by the most hassle-free warranty in the business.

![image 12](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile12.png)

| |---|

###################### SECTION 1 − SAFETY PRECAUTIONS - READ BEFORE USING 1.................................

  • 1-1. Symbol Usage 1.......................................................................
  • 1-2. Arc Welding Hazards 1.................................................................
  • 1-3. Additional Symbols For Installation, Operation, And Maintenance 3.............................
  • Page 3

  • 1-4. California Proposition 65 Warnings 4......................................................
  • 1-5. Principal Safety Standards 4.............................................................
  • 1-6. EMF Information 4.....................................................................
  • ###################### SECTION 2 − CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ − LIRE AVANT UTILISATION 5...........................

  • 2-1. Symboles utilisés 5.....................................................................
  • 2-2. Dangers relatifs au soudage à l’arc 5......................................................
  • 2-3. Dangers supplémentaires en relation avec l’installation, le fonctionnement et la maintenance 7.....
  • 2-4. Proposition californienne 65 Avertissements 8..............................................
  • 2-5. Principales normes de sécurité 9.........................................................
  • 2-6. Informations relatives aux CEM 9.........................................................
  • ###################### SECTION 3 − DEFINITIONS (CE Models Only) 11.................................................

  • 3-1. Warning Label Definitions 11..............................................................
  • 3-2. WEEE Label (For Products Sold Within The EU) 13..........................................
  • 3-3. Symbols And Definitions 14...............................................................
  • ###################### SECTION 4 − INSTALLATION 15................................................................

  • 4-1. Important Information Regarding CE Products (Sold Within The EU) 15..........................
  • 4-2. Serial Number And Rating Label Location 16................................................
  • 4-3. Specifications 16........................................................................
  • 4-4. Duty Cycle and Overheating 19...........................................................
  • 4-5. Volt-Ampere Curves 21..................................................................
  • 4-6. Selecting A Location 23..................................................................
  • 4-7. Tipping Warnings 23.....................................................................
  • 4-8. Dimensions, Weights And Base Mounting Hole Layout 24.....................................
  • 4-9. Electrical Service Guide 25...............................................................
  • 4-10. Connecting Input Power For 350 Models 29.................................................
  • 4-11. Connecting Input Power For 700 Models 31.................................................
  • 4-12. Weld Output Terminals And Selecting Cable Sizes* 34........................................
  • 4-13. Remote 14 Receptacle Information (Used Without Automation Connection) 35....................
  • 4-14. Automation Connection (For 28-Pin Receptacle If Present) 36..................................
  • 4-15. Remote Memory Select Inputs (For 28-Pin Receptacle If Present) 37............................
  • Page 4

  • 4-16. Automation Selections (For 28-Pin Receptacle If Present) 37...................................
  • 4-17. Typical Automation Application 38.........................................................
  • 4-18. 115 Volts AC Duplex Receptacle, Supplementary Protector CB1, And Power Switch 38............
  • 4-19. Gas Connections 39.....................................................................
  • 4-20. TIG HF Impulse/ Lift-Arc Connections 39.................................................
  • 4-21. Cooler Connections 40...................................................................
  • 4-22. Dynasty Stick Connections 41............................................................
  • 4-23. Maxstar Stick Connections 41.............................................................
  • ###################### SECTION 5 − OPERATION 42...................................................................

  • 5-1. Controls 42............................................................................
  • 5-2. Encoder Control 43......................................................................
  • 5-3. Amperage Control 43....................................................................
  • 5-4. Ammeter And Parameter Display 43.......................................................
  • 5-5. Voltmeter And Selected Parameter Display 44...............................................
  • 5-6. Polarity Control (Dynasty Models Only) 44................................................
  • 5-7. Process Control 45......................................................................
  • 5-8. Lift-Arc And HF TIG Start Procedures 45.................................................
  • 5-9. Output Control 46.......................................................................
  • 5-10. Pulser Control 47.......................................................................
  • 5-11. Sequencer Controls 48..................................................................
  • 5-12. Gas/DIG Controls (Preflow/Post Flow/DIG/Purge) 49.........................................
  • 5-13. AC Waveshape (Dynasty Models Only) 50..................................................
  • 5-14. Memory (Program Storage Locations 1-9) 51................................................
  • 5-15. Factory Parameter Defaults And Range And Resolution For 350 Models 52......................
  • 5-16. Factory Parameter Defaults And Range And Resolution For 700 Models 53......................
  • 5-17. Resetting Unit To Factory Default Settings 55................................................
  • 5-18. Software And Revision Viewing 55.........................................................
  • 5-19. Arc Timer/Counter Display 56.............................................................
  • SECTION 6 − ADVANCED FUNCTIONS 57.......................................................
  • 6-1. Accessing Advanced Functions 57.........................................................
  • 6-2. Programmable TIG Start Parameters 58....................................................
  • Page 5

  • 6-3. Output Control And Trigger Functions 63....................................................
  • 6-4. AC Waveshape Selection (Dynasty Models Only) 68..........................................
  • 6-5. Independent Amplitude Selection 69.......................................................
  • 6-6. Spot Enable 69.........................................................................
  • 6-7. Stick Open-Circuit Voltage (OCV) Selection 69...............................................
  • 6-8. Stick Stuck Check Selection 70...........................................................
  • 6-9. Lockout Functions 71....................................................................
  • 6-10. Pulse Welding Display Options 73.........................................................
  • 6-11. DC Meter Calibration 73..................................................................
  • SECTION 7 − MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 74.......................................
  • 7-2. Blowing Out Inside of Unit 75.............................................................
  • 7-3. Coolant Maintenance 75.................................................................
  • 7-4. Troubleshooting 76......................................................................
  • SECTION 8 − ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM 78........................................................
  • SECTION 9 − HIGH FREQUENCY 91............................................................
  • 9-1. Welding Processes Requiring High Frequency 91............................................
  • 9-2. Installation Showing Possible Sources Of HF Interference 91...................................
  • 9-3. Recommended Installation To Reduce HF Interference 92.....................................
  • SECTION 10 − SETUP GUIDES FOR (GTAW) TIG WELDING 93.....................................
  • 10-1. Typical GTAW Setups 93.................................................................
  • SECTION 11 − SELECTING AND PREPARING A TUNGSTEN FOR DC OR AC WELDING WITH INVERTER MACHINES 95

  • 11-1. Selecting Tungsten Electrode (Wear Clean gloves To Prevent Contamination Of Tungsten) 95.......
  • SECTION 12 − GUIDELINES FOR TIG WELDING (GTAW) 96.......................................
  • 12-1. Positioning The Torch 96.................................................................
  • 12-2. Torch Movement During Welding 97........................................................
  • Page 6

  • 12-3. Positioning Torch Tungsten For Various Weld Joints 97........................................
  • SECTION 13 − SETUP GUIDES FOR (SMAW) STICK WELDING 98.................................. 13-1. Front Panel Display For Stick DCEP (Direct Current Electrode Positive) 98.......................
  • SECTION 14 − STICK WELDING (SMAW) GUIDELINES 99.........................................
  • SECTION 15 − PARTS LIST FOR 350 MODELS 106.................................................
  • SECTION 16 − PARTS LIST FOR 700 MODELS 116.................................................
  • SECTION 17 − PARTS LIST FOR COOLER 126....................................................
  • SECTION 18 − PARTS LIST FOR CART 128....................................................... OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES WARRANTY
  • 11-2. Preparing Tungsten Electrode For DC Electrode Negative (DCEN) Welding Or AC Welding With Inverter Machines 95..............................................................................

    ######### DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

    ![image 13](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile13.png)

    for European Community (CE marked) products.

    MILLER Electric Mfg. Co., 1635 Spencer Street, Appleton, WI 54914 U.S.A. declares that the product(s) identified in this declaration conform to the essential requirements and provisions of the stated Council Directive(s) and Standard(s).

    Product/Apparatus Identification:

    |Product|Stock Number| |---|---| |Dynasty 350|907204021| |Maxstar 350|907334021| |Dynasty 700|907101021| |Maxstar 700|907103021|

    Council Directives:

  •  2006/95/EC Low Voltage
  •  2004/108/EC Electromagnetic Compatibility
  • Standards:

    Page 7

  •  IEC 60974-1: 2005 Arc W elding Equipment - W elding Power Sources
  •  IEC 60974-3: 2007 Arc W elding Equipment - Arc Striking and Stabilizing Devices
  •  IEC 60974-10: 2007 Arc W elding Equipment - Electromagnetic Compatibility Requirements
  •  EN 50445 Product family standard to demonstrate compliance of equipment for resistance welding, arc welding and allied processes with the basic restrictions related to human exposure to electromagnetic fields (0 Hz - 300Hz) BS EN 50445:2008.
  • US Signatory: EU Signatory:

    |![image 14](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile14.png)| |---|

    ![image 15](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile15.png)

    _____________________________________ ____________________________________ David A. Werba Mark Lowther MANAGER, PRODUCT DESIGN COMPLIANCE EUROPEAN DIRECTOR, PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT & TECHNOLOGY

    October 29, 2010October 29, 2010

    _________________________________________ ___________________________________________ Date of Declaration Date of Declaration

    241512-D

    | | |---|

    ######### SECTION 1 − SAFETY PRECAUTIONS - READ BEFORE USING

    som _2010−03

    7

    Protect yourself and others from injury — read and follow these precautions.

    ############ 1-1. Symbol Usage

    DANGER! − Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. The possible hazards are shown in the adjoining symbols or explained in the text.

    Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. The possible hazards are shown in the adjoining symbols or explained in the text.

    Page 8

    NOTICE − Indicates statements not related to personal injury.

    Indicates special instructions.

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    This group of symbols means Warning! Watch Out! ELECTRIC SHOCK, MOVING PARTS, and HOT PARTS hazards. Consult symbols and related instructions below for necessary actions to avoid the hazards.

    ############ 1-2. Arc Welding Hazards

    The symbols shown below are used throughout this manual to call attention to and identify possible hazards. When you see the symbol, watch out, and follow the related instructions to avoid the hazard. The safety information given below is only a summary of the more complete safety information found in the Safety Standards listed in Section 1-5. Read and follow all Safety Standards.

    Only qualified persons should install, operate, maintain, and repair this unit.

    During operation, keep everybody, especially children, away.

    | | |---| | |

    ############### ELECTRIC SHOCK can kill.

    Touching live electrical parts can cause fatal shocks or severe burns. The electrode and work circuit is electrically live whenever the output is on. The input power circuit and machine internal circuits are also live when power is on. In semiautomatic or automatic wire welding, the wire, wire reel, drive roll housing, and all metal parts touching the welding wire are electrically live. Incorrectly installed or improperly grounded equipment is a hazard.

    Do not touch live electrical parts. Wear dry, hole-free insulating gloves and body protection.

    Insulate yourself from work and ground using dry insulating mats or covers big enough to prevent any physical contact with the work or ground.

    Do not use AC output in damp areas, if movement is confined, or if there is a danger of falling. Use AC output ONLY if required for the welding process. If AC output is required, use remote output control if present on unit.

    Additional safety precautions are required when any of the following electrically hazardous conditions are present: in damp locations or while wearing wet clothing; on metal structures such as floors, gratings, or scaffolds; when in cramped positions such as sitting, kneeling, or lying; or when there is a high risk of unavoidable or accidental contact with the workpiece or ground. For these conditions, use the following equipment in order presented: 1) a semiautomatic DC constant voltage (wire) welder, 2) a DC manual (stick) welder, or 3) an AC welder with reduced open-circuit voltage. In most situations, use of a DC, constant voltage wire welder is recommended. And, do not work alone!

    Disconnect input power or stop engine before installing or servicing this equipment. Lockout/tagout input power according to OSHA 29 CFR 1910.147 (see Safety Standards).

    Properly install and ground this equipment according to its Owner’s Manual and national, state, and local codes.

    Page 9

    Always verify the supply ground − check and be sure that input power cord ground wire is properly connected to ground terminal in

    disconnect box or that cord plug is connected to a properly grounded receptacle outlet. When making input connections, attach proper grounding conductor first − double-check connections. Keep cords dry, free of oil and grease, and protected from hot metal and sparks. Frequently inspect input power cord for damage or bare wiring − replace cord immediately if damaged − bare wiring can kill. Turn off all equipment when not in use. Do not use worn, damaged, undersized, or poorly spliced cables. Do not drape cables over your body. If earth grounding of the workpiece is required, ground it directly with a separate cable. Do not touch electrode if you are in contact with the work, ground, or another electrode from a different machine.

    Do not touch electrode holders connected to two welding machines at the same time since double open-circuit voltage will be present.

    Use only well-maintained equipment. Repair or replace damaged parts at once. Maintain unit according to manual. Wear a safety harness if working above floor level. Keep all panels and covers securely in place. Clamp work cable with good metal-to-metal contact to workpiece or worktable as near the weld as practical. Insulate work clamp when not connected to workpiece to prevent contact with any metal object. Do not connect more than one electrode or work cable to any single weld output terminal.

    ############### SIGNIFICANT DC VOLTAGE exists in inverter welding power sources AFTER removal of inputpower.

    Turn Off inverter, disconnect input power, and discharge input capacitors according to instructions in Maintenance Section before touching any parts.

    | | |---|

    ############### HOT PARTS can burn.

    Do not touch hot parts bare handed. Allow cooling period before working on equipment.

    To handle hot parts, use proper tools and/or wear heavy, insulated welding gloves and clothing to prevent burns.

    | | |---|

    ################## FUMES AND GASES can be hazardous.

    Welding produces fumes and gases. Breathing these fumes and gases can be hazardous to your health.

    Keep your head out of the fumes. Do not breathe the fumes. If inside, ventilate the area and/or use local forced ventilation at the arc to remove welding fumes and gases. If ventilation is poor, wear an approved air-supplied respirator.

    Read and understand the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs) and the manufacturer’s instructions for metals, consumables, coatings, cleaners, and degreasers.

    Work in a confined space only if it is well ventilated, or while wearing an air-supplied respirator. Always have a trained watchperson nearby. Welding fumes and gases can displace air and lower the oxygen level causing injury or death. Be sure the breathing air is safe.

    Do not weld in locations near degreasing, cleaning, or spraying operations. The heat and rays of the arc can react with vapors to form highly toxic and irritating gases.

    Page 10

    Do not weld on coated metals, such as galvanized, lead, or cadmium plated steel, unless the coating is removed from the weld area, the area is well ventilated, and while wearing an air-supplied respirator. The coatings and any metals containing these elements can give off toxic fumes if welded.

    ############### ARC RAYS can burn eyes and skin.

    Arc rays from the welding process produce intense visible and invisible (ultraviolet and infrared) rays that can burn eyes and skin. Sparks fly off from the weld.

    Wear an approved welding helmet fitted with a proper shade of filter lenses to protect your face and eyes from arc rays and sparks when welding or watching (see ANSI Z49.1 and Z87.1 listed in Safety Standards).

    Wear approved safety glasses with side shields under your helmet.

    Use protective screens or barriers to protect others from flash, glare and sparks; warn others not to watch the arc.

    Wear protective clothing made from durable, flame-resistant material (leather, heavy cotton, or wool) and foot protection.

    | | |---|

    ################# WELDING can cause fire or explosion.

    Welding on closed containers, such as tanks, drums, or pipes, can cause them to blow up. Sparks can fly off from the welding arc. The flying sparks, hot workpiece, and hot equipment can cause fires and

    burns. Accidental contact of electrode to metal objects can cause sparks, explosion, overheating, or fire. Check and be sure the area is safe before doing any welding.

    Remove all flammables within 35 ft (10.7 m) of the welding arc. If this is not possible, tightly cover them with approved covers.

    Do not weld where flying sparks can strike flammable material. Protect yourself and others from flying sparks and hot metal. Be alert that welding sparks and hot materials from welding can easily go through small cracks and openings to adjacent areas. Watch for fire, and keep a fire extinguisher nearby. Be aware that welding on a ceiling, floor, bulkhead, or partition can cause fire on the hidden side.

    Do not weld on closed containers such as tanks, drums, or pipes, unless they are properly prepared according to AWS F4.1 (see Safety Standards).

    Do not weld where the atmosphere may contain flammable dust, gas, or liquid vapors (such as gasoline).

    Connect work cable to the work as close to the welding area as practical to prevent welding current from traveling long, possibly unknown paths and causing electric shock, sparks, and fire hazards.

    Do not use welder to thaw frozen pipes. Remove stick electrode from holder or cut off welding wire at contact tip when not in use.

    Wear oil-free protective garments such as leather gloves, heavy shirt, cuffless trousers, high shoes, and a cap.

    Remove any combustibles, such as a butane lighter or matches, from your person before doing any welding.

    Page 11

    After completion of work, inspect area to ensure it is free of sparks, glowing embers, and flames.

    Use only correct fuses or circuit breakers. Do not oversize or bypass them.

    Follow requirements in OSHA 1910.252 (a) (2) (iv) and NFPA 51B for hot work and have a fire watcher and extinguisher nearby.

    ################## FLYING METAL or DIRT can injure eyes.

    Welding, chipping, wire brushing, and grinding cause sparks and flying metal. As welds cool, they can throw off slag.

    Wear approved safety glasses with side shields even under your welding helmet.

    ############### BUILDUP OF GAS can injure or kill.

    Shut off shielding gas supply when not in use. Always ventilate confined spaces or use approved air-supplied respirator.

    ##################### ELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC FIELDS (EMF) can affect ImplantedMedical Devices.

    Wearers of Pacemakers and other Implanted Medical Devices should keep away.

    Implanted Medical Device wearers should consult their doctor and the device manufacturer before going near arc welding, spot welding, gouging, plasma arc cutting, or induction heating operations.

    | | |---|

    ############### NOISE can damage hearing.

    Noise from some processes or equipment can damage hearing.

    Wear approved ear protection if noise level is high.

    |![image 16](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile16.png)| |---|

    ############### CYLINDERS can explode if damaged.

    Page 12

    Shielding gas cylinders contain gas under high pressure. If damaged, a cylinder can explode. Since gas cylinders are normally part of the welding process, be sure to treat them carefully.

    Protect compressed gas cylinders from excessive heat, mechanical shocks, physical damage, slag, open flames, sparks, and arcs. Install cylinders in an upright position by securing to a stationary support or cylinder rack to prevent falling or tipping. Keep cylinders away from any welding or other electrical circuits. Never drape a welding torch over a gas cylinder. Never allow a welding electrode to touch any cylinder. Never weld on a pressurized cylinder − explosion will result.

    Use only correct shielding gas cylinders, regulators, hoses, and fittings designed for the specific application; maintain them and associated parts in good condition.

    Turn face away from valve outlet when opening cylinder valve. Keep protective cap in place over valve except when cylinder is in use or connected for use. Use the right equipment, correct procedures, and sufficient number of persons to lift and move cylinders.

    Read and follow instructions on compressed gas cylinders, associated equipment, and Compressed Gas Association (CGA) publication P-1 listed in Safety Standards.

    ############ 1-3. Additional Symbols For Installation, Operation, And Maintenance

    ############### FIRE OR EXPLOSION hazard.

    Do not install or place unit on, over, or near combustible surfaces. Do not install unit near flammables.

    Do not overload building wiring − be sure power supply system is properly sized, rated, and protected to handle this unit.

    ############### FALLING EQUIPMENT can injure.

    Use lifting eye to lift unit only, NOT running gear, gas cylinders, or any other accessories. Use equipment of adequate capacity to lift and support unit.

    If using lift forks to move unit, be sure forks are long enough to extend beyond opposite side of unit.

    Keep equipment (cables and cords) away from moving vehicles when working from an aerial location.

    Follow the guidelines in the Applications Manual for the Revised NIOSH Lifting Equation (Publication No. 94−110) when manually lifting heavy parts or equipment.

    ############### OVERUSE can cause OVERHEATING

    Allow cooling period; follow rated duty cycle. Reduce current or reduce duty cycle before starting to weld again. Do not block or filter airflow to unit.

    ############### FLYING SPARKS can injure.

    Wear a face shield to protect eyes and face.

    Shape tungsten electrode only on grinder with proper guards in a safe location wearing proper face, hand, and body protection.

    Sparks can cause fires — keep flammables away.

    Page 13

    ################# STATIC (ESD) can damage PC boards.

    Put on grounded wrist strap BEFORE handling boards or parts. Use proper static-proof bags and boxes to store, move, or ship PC boards.

    ############### MOVING PARTS can injure.

    Keep away from moving parts. Keep away from pinch points such as drive rolls.

    ############### WELDING WIRE can injure.

    Do not press gun trigger until instructed to do so.

    Do not point gun toward any part of the body, other people, or any metal when threading welding wire.

    ############### MOVING PARTS can injure.

    Keep away from moving parts such as fans. Keep all doors, panels, covers, and guards closed and securely in place.

    Have only qualified persons remove doors, panels, covers, or guards for maintenance and troubleshooting as necessary. Reinstall doors, panels, covers, or guards when maintenance is finished and before reconnecting input power.

    ############### READ INSTRUCTIONS.

    Read and follow all labels and the Owner’s Manual carefully before installing, operating, or servicing unit. Read the safety information at the beginning of the manual and in each section.

    Use only genuine replacement parts from the manufacturer.

    Perform maintenance and service according to the Owner’s Manuals, industry standards, and national, state, and local codes.

    ################### H.F. RADIATION can cause interference.

    High-frequency (H.F.) can interfere with radio navigation, safety services, computers, and communications equipment.

    Have only qualified persons familiar with electronic equipment perform this installation.

    The user is responsible for having a qualified electrician promptly correct any interference problem resulting from the installation.

    If notified by the FCC about interference, stop using the equipment at once. Have the installation regularly checked and maintained.

    Page 14

    Keep high-frequency source doors and panels tightly shut, keep spark gaps at correct setting, and use grounding and shielding to minimize the possibility of interference.

    | | |---|

    ################### ARC WELDING can cause interference.

    Electromagnetic energy can interfere with sensitive electronic equipment such as computers and computer-driven equipment such as robots.

    Be sure all equipment in the welding area is electromagnetically compatible.

    To reduce possible interference, keep weld cables as short as possible, close together, and down low, such as on the floor.

    Locate welding operation 100 meters from any sensitive electronic equipment. Be sure this welding machine is installed and grounded according to this manual.

    If interference still occurs, the user must take extra measures such as moving the welding machine, using shielded cables, using line filters, or shielding the work area.

    ############ 1-4. California Proposition 65 Warnings

    Welding or cutting equipment produces fumes or gases which contain chemicals known to the State of California to cause birth defects and, in some cases, cancer. (California Health & Safety Code Section 25249.5 et seq.)

    Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.

    This product contains chemicals, including lead, known to the state of California to cause cancer, birth defects, or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after use.

    For Gasoline Engines:

    Engine exhaust contains chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, or other reproductive harm.

    For Diesel Engines:

    Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents are known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, and other reproductive harm.

    ############ 1-5. Principal Safety Standards

    Safety in Welding, Cutting, and Allied Processes, ANSI Standard Z49.1, from Global Engineering Documents (phone: 1-877-413-5184, website: www.global.ihs.com).

    Safe Practices for the Preparation of Containers and Piping for Welding and Cutting, American Welding Society Standard AWS F4.1, from Global Engineering Documents (phone: 1-877-413-5184, website: www.global.ihs.com).

    Page 15

    National Electrical Code, NFPA Standard 70, from National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, MA 02269 (phone: 1-800-344-3555, website: www.nfpa.org and www. sparky.org).

    Safe Handling of Compressed Gases in Cylinders, CGA Pamphlet P-1, from Compressed Gas Association, 4221 Walney Road, 5th Floor, Chantilly, VA 20151 (phone: 703-788-2700, website:www.cganet.com). Safety in Welding, Cutting, and Allied Processes, CSA Standard W117.2, from Canadian Standards Association, Standards Sales, 5060 Spectrum Way, Suite 100, Ontario, Canada L4W 5NS (phone: 800-463-6727, website: www.csa-international.org).

    Safe Practice For Occupational And Educational Eye And Face Protection, ANSI Standard Z87.1, from American National Standards Institute,

    25 West 43rd Street, New York, NY 10036 (phone: 212-642-4900, website: www.ansi.org).

    Standard for Fire Prevention During Welding, Cutting, and Other Hot Work, NFPA Standard 51B, from National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, MA 02269 (phone: 1-800-344-3555, website: www.nfpa.org.

    OSHA, Occupational Safety and Health Standards for General Industry, Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Part 1910, Subpart Q, and Part 1926, Subpart J, from U.S. Government Printing Office, Superintendent of Documents, P.O. Box 371954, Pittsburgh, PA 15250-7954 (phone: 1-866-512-1800) (there are 10 OSHA Regional Officesphone for Region 5, Chicago, is 312-353-2220, website: www.osha.gov).

    U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC), 4330 East West Highway, Bethesda, MD 20814 (phone: 301-504-7923, website: www.cpsc.gov).

    Applications Manual for the Revised NIOSH Lifting Equation, The National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), 1600 Clifton Rd, Atlanta, GA 30333 (phone: 1-800-232-4636, website: www.cdc.gov/NIOSH).

    ############ 1-6. EMF Information

    Electric current flowing through any conductor causes localized electric and magnetic fields (EMF). Welding current creates an EMF field around the welding circuit and welding equipment. EMF fields may interfere with some medical implants, e.g. pacemakers. Protective measures for persons wearing medical implants have to be taken. For example, access restrictions for passers−by or individual risk assessment for welders. All welders should use the following procedures in order to minimize exposure to EMF fields from the welding circuit:

  • 1. Keep cables close together by twisting or taping them, or using a cable cover.
  • 2. Do not place your body between welding cables. Arrange cables to one side and away from the operator.
  • 3. Do not coil or drape cables around your body.
  • 4. Keep head and trunk as far away from the equipment in the welding circuit as possible.
  • 5. Connect work clamp to workpiece as close to the weld as possible.
  • 6. Do not work next to, sit or lean on the welding power source.
  • 7. Do not weld whilst carrying the welding power source or wire feeder.
  • ###################### About Implanted Medical Devices:

    Implanted Medical Device wearers should consult their doctor and the device manufacturer before performing or going near arc welding, spot welding, gouging, plasma arc cutting, or induction heating operations. If cleared by your doctor, then following the above procedures is recommended.

    ######### SECTION 2 − CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ − LIRE AVANT UTILISATION

    fre_som_2010−03

    Page 16

    7

    Se protéger et protéger les autres contre le risque de blessure — lire et respecter ces consignes.

    ############ 2-1. Symboles utilisés

    DANGER! − Indique une situation dangereuse qui si on l’évite pas peut donner la mort ou des blessures graves. Les dangers possibles sont montrés par les symboles joints ou sont expliqués dans le texte.

    Indique une situation dangereuse qui si on l’évite pas peut donner la mort ou des blessures graves. Les dangers possibles sont montrés par les symboles joints ou sont expliqués dans le texte.

    NOTE − Indique des déclarations pas en relation avec des blessures personnelles.

    Indique des instructions spécifiques.

    | | | | |---|---|---|

    Ce groupe de symboles veut dire Avertissement! Attention! DANGER DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE, PIECES EN MOUVEMENT, et PIECES CHAUDES. Consulter les symboles et les instructions ci-dessous y afférant pour les actions nécessaires afin d’éviter le danger.

    ############ 2-2. Dangers relatifs au soudage à l’arc

    Les symboles représentés ci-dessous sont utilisés dans ce manuel pour attirer l’attention et identifier les dangers possibles. En présence de l’un de ces symboles, prendre garde et suivre les instructions afférentes pour éviter tout risque. Les instructions en matière de sécurité indiquées ci-dessous ne constituent qu’un sommaire des instructions de sécurité plus complètes fournies dans les normes de sécurité énumérées dans la Section 2-5. Lire et observer toutes les normes de sécurité.

    Seul un personnel qualifié est autorisé à installer, faire fonctionner, entretenir et réparer cet appareil.

    Pendant le fonctionnement, maintenir à distance toutes les personnes, notamment les enfants de l’appareil.

    | | |---| | |

    ############### UNE DÉCHARGE ÉLECTRIQUE peut entraîner la mort.

    Le contact d’organes électriques sous tension peut provoquer des accidents mortels ou des brûlures graves. Le circuit de l’électrode et de la pièce est sous tension lorsque le courant est délivré à la sortie. Le circuit d’alimentation et les circuits internes de la machine sont également sous tension lorsque l’alimentation est sur Marche. Dans le mode de soudage avec du fil, le fil, le dérouleur, le bloc de commande du rouleau et toutes les parties métalliques en contact avec le fil sont sous tension électrique. Un équipement installé ou mis à la terre de manière incorrecte ou impropre constitue un danger.

    Ne pas toucher aux pièces électriques sous tension. Porter des gants isolants et des vêtements de protection secs et sans trous.

    Page 17

    S’isoler de la pièce à couper et du sol en utilisant des housses ou des tapis assez grands afin d’éviter tout contact physique avec la pièce à couper ou le sol.

    Ne pas se servir de source électrique à courant électrique dans les zones humides, dans les endroits confinés ou là où on risque de tomber.

    Se servir d’une source électrique à courant électrique UNIQUEMENT si le procédé de soudage le demande.

    Si l’utilisation d’une source électrique à courant électrique s’avère nécessaire, se servir de la fonction de télécommande si l’appareil en est équipé.

    D’autres consignes de sécurité sont nécessaires dans les conditions suivantes : risques électriques dans un environnement humide ou si l’on porte des vêtements mouillés ; sur des structures métalliques telles que sols, grilles ou échafaudages ; en position coincée comme assise, à genoux ou couchée ; ou s’il y a un risque élevé de contact inévitable ou accidentel avec la pièce à souder ou le sol. Dans ces conditions, utiliser les équipements suivants,

    dans l’ordre indiqué : 1) un poste à souder DC à tension constante (à fil), 2) un poste à souder DC manuel (électrode) ou 3) un poste à souder AC à tension à vide réduite. Dans la plupart des situations, l’utilisation d’un poste à souder DC à fil à tension constante est recommandée. En outre, ne pas travailler seul !

    Couper l’alimentation ou arrêter le moteur avant de procéder à l’installation, à la réparation ou à l’entretien de l’appareil. Déverrouiller l’alimentation selon la norme OSHA 29 CFR 1910.147 (voir normes de sécurité).

    Installer le poste correctement et le mettre à la terre convenablement selon les consignes du manuel de l’opérateur et les normes nationales, provinciales et locales.

    Toujours vérifier la terre du cordon d’alimentation. Vérifier et s’assurer que le fil de terre du cordon d’alimentation est bien raccordé à la borne de terre du sectionneur ou que la fiche du cordon est raccordée à une prise correctement mise à la terre.

    En effectuant les raccordements d’entrée, fixer d’abord le conducteur de mise à la terre approprié et contre-vérifier les connexions.

    Les câbles doivent être exempts d’humidité, d’huile et de graisse; protégez−les contre les étincelles et les pièces métalliques chaudes.

    Vérifier fréquemment le cordon d’alimentation afin de s’assurer qu’il n’est pas altéré ou à nu, le remplacer immédiatement s’il l’est. Un fil à nu peut entraîner la mort.

    L’équipement doit être hors tension lorsqu’il n’est pas utilisé. Ne pas utiliser des câbles usés, endommagés, de grosseur insuffisante ou mal épissés. Ne pas enrouler les câbles autour du corps. Si la pièce soudée doit être mise à la terre, le faire directement avec un câble distinct. Ne pas toucher l’électrode quand on est en contact avec la pièce, la terre ou une électrode provenant d’une autre machine.

    Ne pas toucher des porte électrodes connectés à deux machines en même temps à cause de la présence d’une tension à vide doublée.

    N’utiliser qu’un matériel en bon état. Réparer ou remplacer sur-lechamp les pièces endommagées. Entretenir l’appareil conformément à ce manuel.

    Porter un harnais de sécurité si l’on doit travailler au-dessus du sol. S’assurer que tous les panneaux et couvercles sont correctement en place.

    Fixer le câble de retour de façon à obtenir un bon contact métalmétal avec la pièce à souder ou la table de travail, le plus près possible de la soudure.

    Isoler la pince de masse quand pas mis à la pièce pour éviter le contact avec tout objet métallique.

    Ne pas raccorder plus d’une électrode ou plus d’un câble de masse à une même borne de sortie de soudage.

    Page 18

    ############### Il reste une TENSION DC NON NÉGLIGEABLE dans les sources de soudage onduleur UNE FOIS l’alimentation coupée.

    Arrêter les convertisseurs, débrancher le courant électrique et décharger les condensateurs d’alimentation selon les instructions indiquées dans la partie Entretien avant de toucher les pièces.

    ############### LES PIÈCES CHAUDES peuvent provoquer des brûlures.

    Ne pas toucher à mains nues les parties chaudes. Prévoir une période de refroidissement avant de travailler à l’équipement.

    Ne pas toucher aux pièces chaudes, utiliser les outils recommandés et porter des gants de soudage et des vêtements épais pour éviter les brûlures.

    | | |---|

    ############### LES FUMÉES ET LES GAZ peuvent être dangereux.

    Le soudage génère des fumées et des gaz. Leur inhalation peut être dangereux pour votre santé.

    Eloigner votre tête des fumées. Ne pas respirer les fumées.

    À l’intérieur, ventiler la zone et/ou utiliser une ventilation forcée au niveau de l’arc pour l’évacuation des fumées et des gaz de soudage.

    Si la ventilation est médiocre, porter un respirateur anti-vapeurs approuvé.

    Lire et comprendre les spécifications de sécurité des matériaux (MSDS) et les instructions du fabricant concernant les métaux, les consommables, les revêtements, les nettoyants et les dégraisseurs.

    Travailler dans un espace fermé seulement s’il est bien ventilé ou en portant un respirateur à alimentation d’air. Demander toujours à un surveillant dûment formé de se tenir à proximité. Des fumées et des gaz de soudage peuvent déplacer l’air et abaisser le niveau d’oxygène provoquant des blessures ou des accidents mortels. S’assurer que l’air de respiration ne présente aucun danger.

    Ne pas souder dans des endroits situés à proximité d’opérations de dégraissage, de nettoyage ou de pulvérisation. La chaleur et les rayons de l’arc peuvent réagir en présence de vapeurs et former des gaz hautement toxiques et irritants.

    Ne pas souder des métaux munis d’un revêtement, tels que l’acier galvanisé, plaqué en plomb ou au cadmium à moins que le revêtement n’ait été enlevé dans la zone de soudure, que l’endroit soit bien ventilé, et en portant un respirateur à alimentation d’air. Les revêtements et tous les métaux renfermant ces éléments peuvent dégager des fumées toxiques en cas de soudage.

    ############### LES RAYONS DE L’ARC peuvent provoquer des brûlures dans les yeux et sur la peau.

    Le rayonnement de l’arc du procédé de soudage génère des rayons visibles et invisibles intense

    (ultraviolets et infrarouges) susceptibles de provoquer des brûlure dans les yeux et sur la peau. Des étincelles sont projetées pendant le soudage.

    Porter un casque de soudage approuvé muni de verres filtrants approprié pour protéger visage et yeux pour protéger votre visage et vos yeux pendant le soudage ou pour regarder (voir ANSI Z49.1 et Z87.1 énuméré dans les normes de sécurité).

    Page 19

    Porter des lunettes de sécurité avec écrans latéraux même sous votre casque.

    Avoir recours à des écrans protecteurs ou à des rideaux pour protéger les autres contre les rayonnements les éblouissements et les étincelles ; prévenir toute personne sur les lieux de ne pas regarder l’arc.

    Porter des vêtements confectionnés avec des matières résistantes et ignifuges (cuir, coton lourd ou laine) et des bottes de protection.

    | | |---|

    ############### LE SOUDAGE peut provoquer un incendie ou une explosion.

    Le soudage effectué sur des conteneurs fermés tels que des réservoirs, tambours ou des conduites peut provoquer leur éclatement. Des étincelles peuvent

    être projetées de l’arc de soudure. La projection d’étincelles, des pièces chaudes et des équipements chauds peut provoquer des incendies et des brûlures. Le contact accidentel de l’électrode avec des objets métalliques peut provoquer des étincelles, une explosion, un surchauffement ou un incendie. Avant de commencer le soudage, vérifier et s’assurer que l’endroit ne présente pas de danger.

    Déplacer toutes les substances inflammables à une distance de 10,7 m de l’arc de soudage. En cas d’impossibilité les recouvrir soigneusement avec des protections homologués.

    Ne pas souder dans un endroit là où des étincelles peuvent tomber sur des substances inflammables.

    Se protéger et d’autres personnes de la projection d’étincelles et de métal chaud.

    Des étincelles et des matériaux chauds du soudage peuvent facilement passer dans d’autres zones en traversant de petites fissures et des ouvertures.

    Surveiller tout déclenchement d’incendie et tenir un extincteur à proximité.

    Le soudage effectué sur un plafond, plancher, paroi ou séparation peut déclencher un incendie de l’autre côté.

    Ne pas effectuer le soudage sur des conteneurs fermés tels que des réservoirs, tambours, ou conduites, à moins qu’ils n’aient été préparés correctement conformément à AWS F4.1 (voir les normes de sécurité).

    Ne soudez pas si l’air ambiant est chargé de particules, gaz, ou vapeurs inflammables (vapeur d’essence, par exemple).

    Brancher le câble de masse sur la pièce le plus près possible de la zone de soudage pour éviter le transport du courant sur une longue distance par des chemins inconnus éventuels en provoquant des risques d’électrocution, d’étincelles et d’incendie.

    Ne pas utiliser le poste de soudage pour dégeler des conduites gelées.

    En cas de non utilisation, enlever la baguette d’électrode du porteélectrode ou couper le fil à la pointe de contact.

    Page 20

    Porter des vêtements de protection dépourvus d’huile tels que des gants en cuir, une chemise en matériau lourd, des pantalons sans revers, des chaussures hautes et un couvre chef.

    Avant de souder, retirer toute substance combustible de vos poches telles qu’un allumeur au butane ou des allumettes.

    Une fois le travail achevé, assurez−vous qu’il ne reste aucune trace d’étincelles incandescentes ni de flammes.

    Utiliser exclusivement des fusibles ou coupe−circuits appropriés. Ne pas augmenter leur puissance; ne pas les ponter.

    Une fois le travail achevé, assurez−vous qu’il ne reste aucune trace d’étincelles incandescentes ni de flammes.

    Utiliser exclusivement des fusibles ou coupe−circuits appropriés. Ne pas augmenter leur puissance; ne pas les ponter.

    Suivre les recommandations dans OSHA 1910.252(a)(2)(iv) et NFPA 51B pour les travaux à chaud et avoir de la surveillance et un extincteur à proximité.

    | | |---|

    ############### DES PIECES DE METAL ou DES SALETES peuvent provoquer des blessures dans les yeux.

    Le soudage, l’écaillement, le passage de la pièce à la brosse en fil de fer, et le meulage génèrent des étincelles et des particules métalliques volantes. Pendant la période de refroidissement des soudures, elles risquent de projeter du laitier.

    Porter des lunettes de sécurité avec écrans latéraux ou un écran facial.

    ############### LES ACCUMULATIONS DE GAZ risquent de provoquer des blessures ou même la mort.

    Fermer l’alimentation du gaz protecteur en cas de non-utilisation.

    Veiller toujours à bien aérer les espaces confinés ou se servir d’un respirateur d’adduction d’air homologué.

    ##################### Les CHAMPS ÉLECTROMAGNÉTIQUES (CEM) peuvent affecter les implants médicaux.

    Les porteurs de stimulateurs cardiaques et autres implants médicaux doivent rester à distance.

    Les porteurs d’implants médicaux doivent consulter leur médecin et le fabricant du dispositif avant de s’approcher de la zone où se déroule du soudage à l’arc, du soudage par points, du gougeage, de la découpe plasma ou une opération de chauffage par induction.

    | | |---|

    Page 21

    ############### LE BRUIT peut endommager l’ouïe.

    Le bruit des processus et des équipements peut affecter l’ouïe.

    Porter des protections approuvées pour les oreilles si le niveau sonore est trop élevé.

    |![image 17](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile17.png)| |---|

    ############### LES BOUTEILLES peuvent exploser si elles sont endommagées.

    Des bouteilles de gaz protecteur contiennent du gaz sous haute pression. Si une bouteille est endommagée, elle peut exploser. Du fait que les bouteilles de gaz font normalement partie du procédé de

    soudage, les manipuler avec précaution.

    Protéger les bouteilles de gaz comprimé d’une chaleur excessive, des chocs mécaniques, des dommages physiques, du laitier, des flammes ouvertes, des étincelles et des arcs.

    Placer les bouteilles debout en les fixant dans un support stationnaire ou dans un porte-bouteilles pour les empêcher de tomber ou de se renverser.

    Tenir les bouteilles éloignées des circuits de soudage ou autres circuits électriques.

    Ne jamais placer une torche de soudage sur une bouteille à gaz. Une électrode de soudage ne doit jamais entrer en contact avec une bouteille. Ne jamais souder une bouteille pressurisée − risque d’explosion. Utiliser seulement des bouteilles de gaz protecteur, régulateurs, tuyaux et raccords convenables pour cette application spécifique ; les maintenir ainsi que les éléments associés en bon état. Détourner votre visage du détendeur-régulateur lorsque vous ouvrez la soupape de la bouteille. Le couvercle du détendeur doit toujours être en place, sauf lorsque la bouteille est utilisée ou qu’elle est reliée pour usage ultérieur.

    Utiliser les équipements corrects, les bonnes procédures et suffisamment de personnes pour soulever et déplacer les bouteilles.

    Lire et suivre les instructions sur les bouteilles de gaz comprimé, l’équipement connexe et le dépliant P-1 de la CGA (Compressed Gas Association) mentionné dans les principales normes de sécurité.

    ############ 2-3. Dangers supplémentaires en relation avec l’installation, le fonctionnement et la maintenance

    ############### Risque D’INCENDIE OU D’EXPLOSION.

    Ne pas placer l’appareil sur, au-dessus ou à proximité de surfaces inflammables. Ne pas installer l’appareil à proximité de produits inflammables.

    Ne pas surcharger l’installation électrique − s’assurer que l’alimentation est correctement dimensionnée et protégée avant de mettre l’appareil en service.

    ############### LA CHUTE DE L’ÉQUIPEMENT peut provoquer des blessures.

    Page 22

    Utiliser l’anneau de levage uniquement pour soulever l’appareil, NON PAS les chariots, les bouteilles de gaz ou tout autre accessoire.

    Utiliser un équipement de levage de capacité suffisante pour lever l’appareil.

    En utilisant des fourches de levage pour déplacer l’unité, s’assurer que les fourches sont suffisamment longues pour dépasser du côté opposé de l’appareil.

    Tenir l’équipement (câbles et cordons) à distance des véhicules mobiles lors de toute opération en hauteur.

    Suivre les consignes du Manuel des applications pour l’équation de levage NIOSH révisée (Publication Nº94–110) lors du levage manuelle de pièces ou équipements lourds.

    ############### L’EMPLOI EXCESSIF peut SURCHAUFFER L’ÉQUIPEMENT.

    Prévoir une période de refroidissement ; respecter le cycle opératoire nominal. Réduire le courant ou le facteur de marche avant de poursuivre le soudage.

    Ne pas obstruer les passages d’air du poste.

    ############### LES ÉTINCELLES PROJETÉES peuvent provoquer des blessures.

    Porter un écran facial pour protéger le visage et les yeux.

    Affûter l’électrode au tungstène uniquement à la meuleuse dotée de protecteurs. Cette manœuvre est à exécuter dans un endroit sûr lorsque l’on porte l’équipement homologué de protection du visage, des mains et du corps.

    Les étincelles risquent de causer un incendie − éloigner toute substance inflammable.

    | | |---|

    ############### LES CHARGES ÉLECTROSTATIQUES peuvent endommager les circuits imprimés.

    Établir la connexion avec la barrette de terre avant de manipuler des cartes ou des pièces. Utiliser des pochettes et des boîtes antistatiques pour stocker, déplacer ou expédier des cartes de circuits imprimes.

    ############### Les PIÈCES MOBILES peuvent causer des blessures.

    Ne pas s’approcher des organes mobiles. Ne pas s’approcher des points de coincement tels que des rouleaux de commande.

    ############### LES FILS DE SOUDAGE peuvent provoquer des blessures.

    Ne pas appuyer sur la gâchette avant d’en avoir reçu l’instruction.

    Page 23

    Ne pas diriger le pistolet vers soi, d’autres personnes ou toute pièce mécanique en engageant le fil de soudage.

    ############### Les PIÈCES MOBILES peuvent causer des blessures.

    S’abstenir de toucher des organes mobiles tels que des ventilateurs.

    Maintenir fermés et verrouillés les portes, panneaux, recouvrements et dispositifs de protection.

    Lorsque cela est nécessaire pour des travaux d’entretien et de dépannage, faire retirer les portes, panneaux, recouvrements ou dispositifs de protection uniquement par du personnel qualifié.

    Remettre les portes, panneaux, recouvrements ou dispositifs de protection quand l’entretien est terminé et avant de rebrancher l’alimentation électrique.

    | | |---|

    ############### LIRE LES INSTRUCTIONS.

    Lire et appliquer les instructions sur les étiquettes et le Mode d’emploi avant l’installation, l’utilisation ou l’entretien de l’appareil. Lire les informations de sécurité au début du manuel et dans chaque section.

    N’utiliser que les pièces de rechange recommandées par le constructeur.

    Effectuer l’entretien en respectant les manuels d’utilisation, les normes industrielles et les codes nationaux, d’état et locaux.

    | | |---|

    ############### LE RAYONNEMENT HAUTE FRÉQUENCE (H.F.) risque de provoquer des interférences.

    Le rayonnement haute fréquence (H.F.) peut provoquer des interférences avec les équipements de radio−navigation et de communication, les services de sécurité et les ordinateurs.

    Demander seulement à des personnes qualifiées familiarisées avec des équipements électroniques de faire fonctionner l’installation.

    L’utilisateur est tenu de faire corriger rapidement par un électricien qualifié les interférences résultant de l’installation.

    Si le FCC signale des interférences, arrêter immédiatement l’appareil.

    Page 24

    Effectuer régulièrement le contrôle et l’entretien de l’installation.

    Maintenir soigneusement fermés les portes et les panneaux des sources de haute fréquence, maintenir les éclateurs à une distance correcte et utiliser une terre et un blindage pour réduire les interférences éventuelles.

    ############### LE SOUDAGE À L’ARC risque de provoquer des interférences.

    L’énergie électromagnétique risque de provoquer des interférences pour l’équipement électronique sensible tel que les ordinateurs et l’équipement commandé par ordinateur tel que les robots.

    Veiller à ce que tout l’équipement de la zone de soudage soit compatible électromagnétiquement.

    Pour réduire la possibilité d’interférence, maintenir les câbles de soudage aussi courts que possible, les grouper, et les poser aussi bas que possible (ex. par terre).

    Veiller à souder à une distance de 100 mètres de tout équipement électronique sensible. Veiller à ce que ce poste de soudage soit posé et mis à la terre conformément à ce mode d’emploi.

    En cas d’interférences après avoir pris les mesures précédentes, il incombe à l’utilisateur de prendre des mesures supplémentaires telles que le déplacement du poste, l’utilisation de câbles blindés, l’utilisation de filtres de ligne ou la pose de protecteurs dans la zone de travail.

    ############ 2-4. Proposition californienne 65 Avertissements

    Les équipements de soudage et de coupage produisent des fumées et des gaz qui contiennent des produits chimiques dont l’État de Californie reconnaît qu’ils provoquent des malformations congénitales et, dans certains cas, des cancers. (Code de santé et de sécurité de Californie, chapitre 25249.5 et suivants)

    Les batteries, les bornes et autres accessoires contiennent du plomb et des composés à base de plomb, produits chimiques dont l’État de Californie reconnaît qu’ils provoquent des cancers et des malformations congénitales ou autres problèmes de procréation. Se laver les mains après manipulation.

    Ce produit contient des produits chimiques, notamment du plomb, dont l’État de Californie reconnaît qu’ils provoquent

    des cancers, des malformations congénitales ou d’autres problèmes de procréation. Se laver les mains après utilisation.

    Pour les moteurs à essence :

    Les gaz d’échappement des moteurs contiennent des produits chimiques dont l’État de Californie reconnaît qu’ils provoquent des cancers et des malformations congénitales ou autres problèmes de procréation.

    Pour les moteurs diesel :

    Les gaz d’échappement des moteurs diesel et certains de leurs composants sont reconnus par l’État de Californie comme provoquant des cancers et des malformations congénitales ou autres problèmes de procréation.

    ############ 2-5. Principales normes de sécurité

    Safety in Welding, Cutting, and Allied Processes, ANSI Standard Z49.1, de Global Engineering Documents (téléphone : 1-877-413-5184, site Internet : www.global.ihs.com).

    25 West 43rd Street, New York, NY 10036 (téléphone : 212-642-4900, site Internet : www.ansi.org).

    Page 25

    Standard for Fire Prevention During Welding, Cutting, and Other Hot Work, NFPA Standard 51B, de National Fire Protection Association, P.O. Box 9101, Quincy, MA 02269-9101 (téléphone : 617-770-3000, site Internet : www.nfpa.org).

    Safe Practices for the Preparation of Containers and Piping for Welding and Cutting, American Welding Society Standard AWS F4.1, de Global Engineering Documents (téléphone : 1-877-413-5184, site internet : www.global.ihs.com).

    OSHA, Occupational Safety and Health Standards for General Industry, Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Part 1910, Subpart Q, and Part 1926, Subpart J, de U.S. Government Printing Office, Superintendent of Documents, P.O. Box 371954, Pittsburgh, PA 15250-7954 (téléphone : 1-866-512-1800) (il y a 10 bureaux régionaux−le téléphone de la région 5, Chicago, est 312-353-2220, site Internet : www.osha.gov).

    National Electrical Code, NFPA Standard 70, de National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, MA 02269 (téléphone : 800-344-3555, site Internet : www.nfpa.org et www.sparky.org).

    Safe Handling of Compressed Gases in Cylinders, CGA Pamphlet P-1, de Compressed Gas Association, 4221 Walney Road, 5th Floor, Chantilly, VA 20151 (téléphone : 703-788-2700, site Internet : www.cganet.com).

    U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC), 4330 East West Highway, Bethesda, MD 20814 (téléphone : 301-504-7923, site internet : www.cpsc.gov).

    Safety in Welding, Cutting, and Allied Processes, CSA Standard W117.2, de Canadian Standards Association, Standards Sales, 5060 Spectrum Way, Suite 100, Ontario, Canada L4W 5NS (téléphone : 800-463-6727, site internet : www.csa-international.org).

    Applications Manual for the Revised NIOSH Lifting Equation, The National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), 1600 Clifton Rd, Atlanta, GA 30333 (télé[hone : 1-800-232-4636, site internet: www.cdc.gov/NIOSH).

    Safe Practice For Occupational And Educational Eye And Face Protection, ANSI Standard Z87.1, de American National Standards Institute,

    ############ 2-6. Informations relatives aux CEM

    Le courant électrique qui traverse tout conducteur génère des champs électromagnétiques (CEM) à certains endroits. Le courant de soudage crée un CEM autour du circuit et du matériel de soudage. Les CEM peuvent créer des interférences avec certains implants médicaux comme des stimulateurs cardiaques. Des mesures de protection pour les porteurs d’implants médicaux doivent être prises: par exemple, des restrictions d’accès pour les passants ou une évaluation individuelle des risques pour les soudeurs. Tous les soudeurs doivent appliquer les procédures suivantes pour minimiser l’exposition aux CEM provenant du circuit de soudage:

  • 1. Rassembler les câbles en les torsadant ou en les attachant avec du ruban adhésif ou avec une housse.
  • 2. Ne pas se tenir au milieu des câbles de soudage. Disposer les câbles d’un côté et à distance de l’opérateur.
  • 3. Ne pas courber et ne pas entourer les câbles autour de votre corps.
  • 4. Maintenir la tête et le torse aussi loin que possible du matériel du circuit de soudage.
  • 5. Connecter la pince sur la pièce aussi près que possible de la soudure.
  • 6. Ne pas travailler à proximité d’une source de soudage, ni s’asseoir ou se pencher dessus.
  • 7. Ne pas souder tout en portant la source de soudage ou le dévidoir.
  • ###################### En ce qui concerne les implants médicaux :

    Les porteurs d’implants doivent d’abord consulter leur médecin avant de s’approcher des opérations de soudage à l’arc, de soudage par points, de gougeage, du coupage plasma ou de chauffage par induction. Si le médecin approuve, il est recommandé de suivre les procédures précédentes.

    | |

    Page 26

    |---|

    ###### SECTION 3 − DEFINITIONS (CE Models Only)

  • 3-1. Warning Label Definitions
  • || | | | | | | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---| |![image 18](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile18.png)|![image 19](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile19.png)

    ![image 20](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile20.png)

    ![image 21](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile21.png)|![image 19](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile19.png)

    ![image 20](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile20.png)

    ![image 21](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile21.png)|![image 22](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile22.png)

    ![image 23](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile23.png)

    ![image 24](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile24.png)|![image 22](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile22.png)

    ![image 23](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile23.png)

    ![image 24](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile24.png)|![image 22](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile22.png)

    ![image 23](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile23.png)

    ![image 24](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile24.png)|![image 25](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile25.png)

    ![image 26](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile26.png)

    ![image 27](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile27.png)|![image 25](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile25.png)

    ![image 26](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile26.png)

    ![image 27](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile27.png)|![image 28](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile28.png)|![image 29](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile29.png)

    ![image 30](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile30.png)

    ![image 31](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile31.png)|![image 29](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile29.png)

    ![image 30](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile30.png)

    ![image 31](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile31.png)| |![image 32](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile32.png)|![image 33](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile33.png)

    ![image 34](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile34.png)

    ![image 35](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile35.png)|![image 36](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile36.png)

    ![image 37](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile37.png)

    ![image 38](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile38.png)|![image 36](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile36.png)

    ![image 37](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile37.png)

    ![image 38](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile38.png)|![image 36](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile36.png)

    ![image 37](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile37.png)

    ![image 38](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile38.png)|![image 39](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile39.png)

    ![image 40](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile40.png)

    ![image 41](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile41.png)|![image 39](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile39.png)

    ![image 40](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile40.png)

    ![image 41](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile41.png)|![image 39](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile39.png)

    ![image 40](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile40.png)

    ![image 41](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile41.png)|![image 42](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile42.png)

    ||![image 43](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile43.png)

    ![image 44](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile44.png)| |---| | |---| |![image 42](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile42.png)

    ||![image 43](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile43.png)

    ![image 44](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile44.png)| |---| | |---| |![image 42](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile42.png)

    ||![image 43](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile43.png)

    ![image 44](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile44.png)| |---| | |---| | |![image 45](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile45.png)|![image 46](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile46.png)

    ![image 47](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile47.png)

    ![image 48](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile48.png)|![image 46](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile46.png)

    ![image 47](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile47.png)

    ![image 48](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile48.png)|![image 46](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile46.png)

    ![image 47](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile47.png)

    ![image 48](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile48.png)|![image 49](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile49.png)

    ![image 50](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile50.png)

    ![image 51](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile51.png)|![image 49](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile49.png)

    ![image 50](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile50.png)

    ![image 51](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile51.png)|![image 49](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile49.png)

    ![image 50](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile50.png)

    ![image 51](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile51.png)|![image 52](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile52.png)

    ![image 53](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile53.png)

    ![image 54](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile54.png)

    ![image 55](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile55.png)|![image 56](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile56.png)|![image 56](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile56.png)|![image 57](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile57.png)

    ![image 58](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile58.png)

    ![image 59](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile59.png)

    ![image 60](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile60.png)

    ![image 61](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile61.png)

    ![image 62](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile62.png)

    ![image 63](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile63.png)|

    Warning! Watch Out! There are possible hazards as shown by the symbols.

    1 Electric shock from welding electrode or wiring can kill.

    1.1 Wear dry insulating gloves. Do not touch electrode with bare hand. Do not wear wet or damaged gloves.
    1.2 Protect yourself from electric shock by insulating yourself from work and ground.
    1.3 Disconnect input plug or power before working on machine.


    2 Breathing welding fumes can be hazardous to your health.

    2.1 Keep your head out of the fumes.
    2.2 Use forced ventilation or local exhaust to remove the fumes.
    2.3 Use ventilating fan to remove fumes.


    3 Welding sparks can cause explosion or fire.


    3.1 Keep flammables away from welding. Do not weld near flammables.
    3.2 Welding sparks can cause fires. Have a fire extinguisher nearby, and have a watchperson ready to use it.


    3.3 Do not weld on drums or any closed containers.

    4 Arc rays can burn eyes and injure skin.

    4.1 Wear hat and safety glasses. Use ear protection and button shirt collar. Use welding helmet with correct shade of filter. Wear complete body protection.

    5 Become trained and read the instructions before working on the machine or welding.
    6 Do not remove or paint over (cover) the label.


    | |---|

    |5

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | | | | | |

    1 1 Warning! Watch Out! There are possible hazards as shown by the symbols.

    2 Electric shock from wiring can kill.
    3 Read the Owner’s Manual before working on this machine.
    4 Disconnect input plug or power before working on machine.
    5 Become trained and read the instructions before working on the machine or welding.


    2 43| |---|

    || | | | | |---|---|---|---|

    Page 27

    | | | | | |![image 64](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile64.png)| | | |

    Warning! Watch Out! There are possible hazards as shown by the symbols.

    1 Electric shock from wiring can kill.
    2 Disconnect input plug or power before working on machine.
    3 Hazardous voltage remains on input capacitors after power is turned off. Do not touch fully charged capacitors.
    4 Always wait 5 minutes after power is turned off before working on unit, OR
    5 Check input capacitor voltage, and be sure it is near 0 before touching any parts.
    6 When power is applied failed parts can explode or cause other parts to explode.
    7 Flying pieces of parts can cause injury. Always wear a face shield when servicing unit.
    8 Always wear long sleeves and button your collar when servicing unit.
    9 After taking proper precautions as shown, connect power to unit.


    1 2 3 45

    6 7 8 9

    | |---|

    || | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---| | | | |![image 65](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile65.png)|S-180 663|

    1 2 3 4 5

    6 7 8 9 source, wire feeder, or other major equipment for welding safety information.

    1 Warning! Watch Out! There are possible hazards as shown by the symbols.
    2 Electric shock from wiring can kill.
    3 Disconnect input plug or power before working on machine.


    4 Moving parts, such as fans, can cut fingers and hands and cause injury. Keep away from moving parts.
    5 Wear safety glasses with side shields.
    6 Read the Owner’s Manual before working on this machine.
    7 Read the labels on the welding power


    8 Recycle or dispose of used coolant in an environmentally safe way.
    9 Do not remove or paint over (cover) the label.
    | |---|

    |4/96

    S-178 910

    =

    043 810 (HF) 043 809 (AL)

    100 h. std.

    21 3

    64

    7

    5

    1 Warning! Watch Out! There are possible hazards as shown by the symbols.
    2 Disconnect input plug or power before working on machine.
    3 Wear safety glasses with side shields.
    4 Plugged filter or hoses cause


    overheating and damage.
    5 Read Owner’s Manual.
    6 Check and clean filter every 100 hours; also check condition of hoses.
    7 Use Low Conductivity Coolant No. 043 810 for High-Frequency assisted or


    Gas Tungsten Arc Welding applications. Use Aluminum Protecting Coolant No. 043 809 where coolant contacts aluminum parts or for Gas Metal Arc Welding applications or where High Frequency is not used.| |---|

    ############ 3-2. WEEE Label (For Products Sold Within The EU)

    |Do not discard product (where applicable) with general waste.

    Reuse or recycle Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) by disposing at a designated collection facility.

    Contact your local recycling office or your local distributor for further information.

    | |---|

    ############ 3-3. Symbols And Definitions

    |A Amperes

    |Output|Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (GTAW)

    |Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW)

    | |---|---|---|---| |V Volts

    |Input

    |3 Phase Static Frequency Converter-Transformer-Rectifier|3 Phase Static Frequency Converter-Transformer-Rectifier| |Output

    |Supplementary Protector

    |Remote|Lift-Arc (GTAW)| |Protective Earth (Ground)|Postflow Timer|Preflow Timer

    |S Seconds

    | |On|Off|Positive

    |Negative| |Alternating Current

    |Gas Input|Gas Output

    |I2

    Rated Welding Current

    | |X Duty Cycle

    |Direct Current

    |Line Connection

    |U2

    Conventional Load Voltage

    | |U1 Primary Voltage

    |IP

    Degree Of Protection

    |I1max

    Rated Maximum Supply Current

    |I1eff

    Maximum Effective Supply Current

    | |U0

    Rated No Load Voltage (Average)

    |Polarity Control|Initial Amperage|Increase/Decrease Of Quantity| |Remote Standard

    | |Gas/DIG Control|Percent

    | |Hz Hertz

    |Recall From Memory|Arc Force (DIG)

    |Impulse Starting (GTAW)| |Final Slope|Final Amperage|Pulse Percent On Time

    |Initial Slope| |AC Waveshape Control

    |Pulser|EP Amperage

    |Pulse Frequency|

    Page 28

    |Work|Electrode|EN Amperage

    |Process| |Unit may be used in environments with increased hazard of electric shock

    |Sequence|Background Amperage

    |f AC Frequency

    | |Water (Coolant) Input

    |Water (Coolant) Output|Circulating Unit With Coolant Pump

    | |

    ###### SECTION 4 − INSTALLATION

    ############ 4-1. Important Information Regarding CE Products (Sold Within The EU)

  • A. Information On Electromagnetic Fields (EMF)
  • |! This equipment shall not be used by the general public as the EMF limits for the general public might be exceeded during welding. This equipment is built in accordance with EN 60974−1 and is intended to be used only in an occupational environment (where the general public access is prohibited or regulated in such a way as to be similar to occupational use) by an expert or an instructed person.

    Wire feeders and ancillary equipment (such as torches, liquid cooling systems and arc striking and stabilizing devices) as part of the welding circuit may not be a major contributor to the EMF. See the Owner’s Manuals for all components of the welding circuit for additional EMF exposure information.

    The EMF assessment on this equipment was conducted at 0.5 meter. At a distance of 1 meter the EMF exposure values were less than 20% of the permissible values.

    The weld cable occupational exposure assessment was performed at the center of a radius of a curved weld cable under worst-case conditions. The following special conditions apply to the operation of this equipment:

    Use mechanized welding operations when welding with AC or pulsed DC processes and power source settings are above 350 A.

    | |---|

  • B. Information On Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) (Dynasty 350)
  • |! This Class A equipment is not intended for use in residential locations where the electrical power is provided by the public low− voltage supply system. There may be potential difficulties in ensuring electromagnetic compatibility in those locations, due to conducted as well as radiated disturbances.

    This equipment complies with IEC 61000−3−12 provided that the short−circuit power Ssc is greater than or equal to 4, 141, 791 at the interface point between the user’s supply and the public system. It is the responsibility of the installer or user of the equipment to ensure, by consultation with the distribution network operator if necessary, that the equipment is connected only to a supply with a short−circuit power Ssc greater than or equal to 4,141, 791.

    | |---|

  • C. Information On Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) (Maxstar 350)
  • |! This Class A equipment is not intended for use in residential locations where the electrical power is provided by the public low− voltage supply system. There may be potential difficulties in ensuring electromagnetic compatibility in those locations, due to conducted as well as radiated disturbances.

    This equipment complies with IEC 61000−3−12 provided that the short−circuit power Ssc is greater than or equal to 1, 340, 274 at the interface point between the user’s supply and the public system. It is the responsibility of the installer or user of the equipment to ensure, by consultation with the distribution network operator if necessary, that the equipment is connected only to a supply with a short−circuit power Ssc greater than or equal to 1, 340, 274.

    | |---|

  • D. Information On Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) (Dynasty 700)
  • |! This Class A equipment is not intended for use in residential locations where the electrical power is provided by the public low− voltage supply system. There may be potential difficulties in ensuring electromagnetic compatibility in those locations, due to conducted as well as radiated disturbances.

    This equipment complies with IEC 61000−3−12 provided that the short−circuit power Ssc is greater than or equal to 9, 394, 172 at the interface point between the user’s supply and the public system. It is the responsibility of the installer or user of the equipment to ensure, by consultation with the distribution network operator if necessary, that the equipment is connected only to a supply with a short−circuit power Ssc greater than or equal to 9, 394, 172.

    | |---|

  • E. Information On Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) (Maxstar 700)
  • |! This Class A equipment is not intended for use in residential locations where the electrical power is provided by the public low− voltage supply system. There may be potential difficulties in ensuring electromagnetic compatibility in those locations, due to conducted as well as radiated disturbances.

    This equipment complies with IEC 61000−3−12 provided that the short−circuit power Ssc is greater than or equal to 3, 259, 047 at the interface point between the user’s supply and the public system. It is the responsibility of the installer or user of the equipment to ensure, by consultation with the distribution network operator if necessary, that the equipment is connected only to a supply with a short−circuit power Ssc greater than or equal to 3, 259, 047.

    | |---|

    Page 29

    ############ 4-2. Serial Number And Rating Label Location

    The serial number and rating information for the power source is located on the front of the machine. Use the rating labels to determine input power requirements and/or rated output. For future reference, write serial number in space provided on back cover of this manual.

    ############ 4-3. Specifications

  • A. Dynasty 350 Models
  • |Input Power|Rated Welding Output|IP Rating|Amperage Range|Max OpenCircuit Voltage DC (Uo)|Rated Peak Striking Voltage (Up)|Amperes Input at Rated Load Output 50/60 Hz|Amperes Input at Rated Load Output 50/60 Hz|Amperes Input at Rated Load Output 50/60 Hz|Amperes Input at Rated Load Output 50/60 Hz|Amperes Input at Rated Load Output 50/60 Hz|Amperes Input at Rated Load Output 50/60 Hz|Amperes Input at Rated Load Output 50/60 Hz|Amperes Input at Rated Load Output 50/60 Hz| |---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---| |Input Power|Rated Welding Output|IP Rating|Amperage Range|Max OpenCircuit Voltage DC (Uo)|Rated Peak Striking Voltage (Up)|208 V|230 V|380 V|400 V|460 V|575 V|KVA|KW| |Three Phase|250 A @ 30 Volts, 100% Duty Cycle|23|5−350|75 10−15|15 KV**|29|26|16|15|13|10|10.3|9.9 *(.06)| |Three Phase|300 A @ 32 Volts, 60% Duty Cycle|23|5−350|75 10−15|15 KV**|36|32|19|18|16|13|12.7|12.1 *(.06)| |Single Phase|180 A @ 27.2 Volts, 100% Duty Cycle|23|5−350|75 10−15|15 KV**|35|32|−−|−−|15|12|7.4|6.8 *(.06)| |Single Phase|225 A @ 29 Volts, 60% Duty Cycle|23|5−350|75 10−15|15 KV**|47|43|−−|−−|21|16|9.8|9.1 *(.06)| |*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|

    ############### B. Maxstar 350 Models

    |Input Power|Rated Welding Output|IP Rating|Amperage Range|Max OpenCircuit Voltage DC (Uo)|Rated Peak Striking Voltage (Up)|Amperes Input at Rated Load Output 50/60 Hz|Amperes Input at Rated Load Output 50/60 Hz|Amperes Input at Rated Load Output 50/60 Hz|Amperes Input at Rated Load Output 50/60 Hz|Amperes Input at Rated Load Output 50/60 Hz|Amperes Input at Rated Load Output 50/60 Hz|Amperes Input at Rated Load Output 50/60 Hz|Amperes Input at Rated Load Output 50/60 Hz| |---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---| |Input Power|Rated Welding Output|IP Rating|Amperage Range|Max OpenCircuit Voltage DC (Uo)|Rated Peak Striking Voltage (Up)|208 V|230 V|380 V|400 V|460 V|575 V|KVA|KW| |Three Phase|250 A @ 30 Volts, 100% Duty Cycle|23|5−350|75 10−15|15 KV**|27|24|15|14|12|9|9.7|9.3 *(.06)| |Three Phase|300 A @ 32 Volts, 60% Duty Cycle|23|5−350|75 10−15|15 KV**|33|30|18|17|15|12|12|11.5 *(.06)| |Single Phase|180 A @ 27.2 Volts, 100% Duty Cycle|23|5−350|75 10−15|15 KV**|32|29|−−|−−|14|11|6.4|6 *(.06)| |Single Phase|225 A @ 29 Volts, 60% Duty Cycle|23|5−350|75 10−15|15 KV**|43|39|−−|−−|19|14|8.6|8.2 *(.06)| |*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|

    ############### C. Dynasty 700 Models

    |Input Power|Rated Welding Output|IP Rating|Amperage Range|Max OpenCircuit Voltage DC (Uo)|Rated Peak Striking voltage (Up)|Amperes Input at Rated Load Output 50/60 Hz|Amperes Input at Rated Load Output 50/60 Hz|Amperes Input at Rated Load Output 50/60 Hz|Amperes Input at Rated Load Output 50/60 Hz|Amperes Input at Rated Load Output 50/60 Hz|Amperes Input at Rated Load Output 50/60 Hz|Amperes Input at Rated Load Output 50/60 Hz|Amperes Input at Rated Load Output 50/60 Hz| |---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---| |Input Power|Rated Welding Output|IP Rating|Amperage Range|Max OpenCircuit Voltage DC (Uo)|Rated Peak Striking voltage (Up)|208 V|230 V|380 V|400 V|460 V|575 V|KVA|KW| |Three Phase|500 A @ 40 Volts, 100% Duty Cycle|23|5−700|75 10−15|15 KV **|75|68|41|39|34|27|27|26 *(.08)| |Three Phase|600 A @ 44 Volts, 60% Duty Cycle|23|5−700|75 10−15|15 KV **|98|88|53|51|43|33|35|34 *(.08)|

    Page 30

    |Single Phase|360 A @ 34 Volts, 100% Duty Cycle|23|5−700|75 10−15|15 KV **|82|74|−−|−−|37|30|17|16 *(.08)| |Single Phase|450 A @ 38 Volts, 60% Duty Cycle|23|5−700|75 10−15|15 KV **|119|105|−−|−−|50|38|24|22 *(.08)| |*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|

    ############### D. Maxstar 700 Models

    |Input Power|Rated Welding Output|IP Rating|Amperage Range|Max OpenCircuit Voltage DC (Uo)|Rated Peak Striking Voltage (Up)|Amperes Input at Rated Load Output 50/60 Hz|Amperes Input at Rated Load Output 50/60 Hz|Amperes Input at Rated Load Output 50/60 Hz|Amperes Input at Rated Load Output 50/60 Hz|Amperes Input at Rated Load Output 50/60 Hz|Amperes Input at Rated Load Output 50/60 Hz|Amperes Input at Rated Load Output 50/60 Hz|Amperes Input at Rated Load Output 50/60 Hz| |---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---| |Input Power|Rated Welding Output|IP Rating|Amperage Range|Max OpenCircuit Voltage DC (Uo)|Rated Peak Striking Voltage (Up)|208 V|230 V|380 V|400 V|460 V|575 V|KVA|KW| |Three Phase|500 A @ 40 Volts, 100% Duty Cycle|23|5−700|75 10−15|15 KV**|67|60|36|35|30|24|24|23 *(.08)| |Three Phase|600 A @ 44 Volts, 60% Duty Cycle|23|5−700|75 10−15|15 KV**|89|80|49|46|40|31|32|31 *(.08)| |Single Phase|360 A @ 34 Volts, 100% Duty Cycle|23|5−700|75 10−15|15 KV**|77|70|−−|−−|35|28|16|15 *(.08)| |Single Phase|450 A @ 38 Volts, 60% Duty Cycle|23|5−700|75 10−15|15 KV**|108|95|−−|−−|45|35|22|21 *(.08)| |*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|*While idling
    Arc starting device is designed for manual guided operations.


    Low open-circuit voltage while in TIG Lift Arc , or while in Stick with low open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7). Normal open-circuit voltage (75 volts) is present while in Stick with normal open-circuit voltage selected (see Section 6-7).

    This unit is equipped with Auto-Line . Auto-Line is an internal inverter power source circuit that automatically links the power source to any primary input voltage from 190 to 625 volts, single-or-three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz. Also adjusts for voltage spikes within the entire range.|

    ############ 4-4. Duty Cycle and Overheating

    | | |Duty Cycle is the percentage of 10 minutes that unit can weld at rated load without overheating.| |---|---|---| |If unit overheats, output stops, a Help message is displayed (see Section 7-4), and cooling fan runs. Wait fifteen minutes for unit to cool. Reduce amperage or voltage, or duty cycle before welding.

    NOTICE − Exceeding duty cycle can damage unit and void warranty.

    Overheating

    0

    15

    A or V

    OR Reduce Duty CycleMinutes

    Output Amperes

    %Duty Cycle

    10 100

    0

    100

    200

    300

    400

    500

    600

    700

    | | | | | | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---| | |700 3 Phase| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |700 1 Phase

    | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |350 3 Phase| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |350 1 Phase| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

    20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90|If unit overheats, output stops, a Help message is displayed (see Section 7-4), and cooling fan runs. Wait fifteen minutes for unit to cool. Reduce amperage or voltage, or duty cycle before welding.

    NOTICE − Exceeding duty cycle can damage unit and void warranty.

    Overheating

    0

    15

    A or V

    OR Reduce Duty CycleMinutes

    Output Amperes

    %Duty Cycle

    10 100

    0

    100

    200

    300

    400

    500

    600

    700

    | | | | | | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---| | |700 3 Phase| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |700 1 Phase

    | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

    Page 31

    | |350 3 Phase| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |350 1 Phase| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

    20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90|If unit overheats, output stops, a Help message is displayed (see Section 7-4), and cooling fan runs. Wait fifteen minutes for unit to cool. Reduce amperage or voltage, or duty cycle before welding.

    NOTICE − Exceeding duty cycle can damage unit and void warranty.

    Overheating

    0

    15

    A or V

    OR Reduce Duty CycleMinutes

    Output Amperes

    %Duty Cycle

    10 100

    0

    100

    200

    300

    400

    500

    600

    700

    | | | | | | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---| | |700 3 Phase| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |700 1 Phase

    | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |350 3 Phase| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |350 1 Phase| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

    20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90|

    #### Notes

    ############ 4-5. Volt-Ampere Curves

    Dynasty 350 AC

    Dynasty 350 DC

    80

    80

    70

    70

    TIG Min

    Page 32

    60

    60

    TIG Max

    Stick Max

    50

    50

    Stick Min Stick Max DIG Min

    AC Volts

    DC Volts

    40

    40

    TIG Min

    30

    30

    TIG Max

    Stick Min DIG Max

    20

    20

    10

    10

    Page 33

    0

    0

    0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400

    DC Amperes

    AC Amperes

    215 138-A / 215 139-A

    80

    70

    60

    50

    Maxstar 350 DC

    Stick Max

    DIG Max

    40

    Stick Min DIG Max

    30

    20

    TIG MaxTIG Min

    10

    Page 34

    0

    0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400

    224 527-A

    Volt-ampere curves show minimum and maximum voltage and amperage output capabilities of unit. Curves of other settings fall between curves shown.

    ############### Dynasty 700 DC Dynasty 700 AC

    90

    100

    90

    80

    80

    70

    70

    60

    Stick Max

    60

    AC Volts

    50

    DC Volts

    TIG Min

    50

    Page 35

    40

    40

    Stick Max DIG Max

    TIG Max

    30

    30

    Stick Min

    Stick Min DIG Max

    20

    20

    TIG Min

    10

    10

    TIG Max

    0

    0

    0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900

    0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800

    DC Amperes

    Page 36

    AC Amperes

    213 342-A / 213 344-A

    ############### Maxstar 700 DC

    80

    | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |S|ick|Mi|DI|M|x| | | | | | | | |Sti DI|k

    M|ax x| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |T|G|in| | | | | |T|IG|Ma| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

    70

    60

    50

    DC Volts

    40

    30

    20

    10

    0

    0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900

    Page 37

    DC Amperes

    215 126-A

    ############ 4-6. Selecting A Location

    Movement

    1

    OR

    2

    Location And Airflow

    1

    18 in. (460 mm)

    3

    18 in. (460 mm)

    ! Falling Unit Can Cause Injury.

    Use equipment of adequate capacity to lift and support unit.

  • 1 Lifting Eye
  • 2 Lifting Forks Use lifting eye or lifting forks to move unit.
  • Use lifting eye to lift unit only, NOT running gear, gas cylinders, or any other accessories.

    If using lifting forks, extend forks beyond opposite side of unit.

  • 3 Line Disconnect Device Locate unit near correct input power supply.
  • Page 38

    ! Special installation may be required where gasoline or volatile liquids are present − see NEC Article 511 or CEC Section 20.

    Ref. 117 264-C / 803 900-B / 223 259-A / 223 275-A

    ############ 4-7. Tipping Warnings

    ! Do not move or operate unit

    where it could tip.

    ############ 4-8. Dimensions, Weights And Base Mounting Hole Layout

    Overall dimensions (A, B, and C) include lifting eye, handles, hardware, etc.

    ############### A. Welding Power Source

    |B

    A

    C

    803 914-A

    CD

    F

    G

    E|Dimensions|Dimensions|Dimensions| |---|---|---|---| |B

    A

    C

    803 914-A

    CD

    F

    G

    E|A|24-3/4 in (654 mm) − 350 Amp Models|34-5/8 in (879 mm) − 700 Amp Models| |B

    A

    C

    803 914-A

    CD

    F

    G

    E|B|13-3/4 in. (349 mm)|13-3/4 in. (349 mm)| |B

    A

    C

    803 914-A

    CD

    F

    G

    E|C|22 in. (559 mm)|22 in. (559 mm)| |B

    A

    C

    803 914-A

    CD

    F

    G

    E|D|20-1/2 in. (521 mm)|20-1/2 in. (521 mm)| |B

    A

    C

    803 914-A

    CD

    F

    G

    E|E|1 in. (25 mm)|1 in. (25 mm)| |B

    A

    C

    803 914-A

    CD

    F

    G

    E|F|11-3/4 in. (298 mm)|11-3/4 in. (298 mm)| |B

    A

    C

    803 914-A

    CD

    F

    G

    E|G|1/2 in. Dia. (13 mm Dia.) 4 Holes|1/2 in. Dia. (13 mm Dia.) 4 Holes| |B

    A

    C

    803 914-A

    CD

    F

    G

    E|Weight|Weight|Weight| |B

    A

    C

    803 914-A

    CD

    F

    G

    E|135.5 lb (61.5 kg)|135.5 lb (61.5 kg)|198 lb (89.8 kg)|

    ############### B. Welding Power Source With Cart And Cooler

    ###################### Dimensions

  • A
  • 350 Models

    45-1/8 in. (1146 mm)

    Page 39

    700 Models 55-1/8 in. (1400 mm)

  • B 23-1/8 in. (587 mm)
  • C 41-3/4 in. (1060 mm)
  • A

    C

    B

    ###################### Weight For 350 Models Weight For 700 Models

    268.5 lb (121.8 Kg) 331 lb (150 Kg)

    804 642-B

    ############ 4-9. Electrical Service Guide

    ############### A. Dynasty 350 Models

    Actual input voltage should not be 10% less than minimum (5% for 380 volt CE models) and/or 10% more than maximum input voltages listed in table. If actual input voltage is outside this range, output may not be be available.

    NOTICE − INCORRECT INPUT POWER can damage this welding power source. Phase to ground voltage shall not exceed +10% of rated input voltage.

    ###################### Failure to follow these electrical service guide recommendations could create an electric shock or fire hazard. These recommendations are for a dedicated branch circuit sized for the rated output and duty cycle of the welding power source.

    |Input Voltage (V)|Three-Phase|Three-Phase|Three-Phase|Three-Phase|Three-Phase|Three-Phase| |---|---|---|---|---|---|---| |Input Voltage (V)|208|230|380|400|460|575| |Input Amperes (A) At Rated Output - 300 amps @ 32 volts|36|32|19|18|16|13| |Max Recommended Standard Fuse Rating In Amperes1 Time-Delay Fuses2 Normal Operating Fuses3

    |40 50|35 45

    |20 30

    |20 25

    |20 25|15 20

    | |Min Input Conductor Size In AWG4|10|10|12|14|14|14| |Max Recommended Input Conductor Length In Feet (Meters)|88 (27)|107 (33)|177 (54)|127 (39)|168 (51)|262 (80)| |Min Grounding Conductor Size In AWG4|10|10|12|14|14|14|

    Page 40

    Reference: 2008 National Electrical Code (NEC) (including article 630)

  • 1 If a circuit breaker is used in place of a fuse, choose a circuit breaker with time-current curves comparable to the recommended fuse.
  • 2 “Time-Delay” fuses are UL class “RK5” . See UL 248.
  • 3 “Normal Operating” (general purpose - no intentional delay) fuses are UL class “K5” (up to and including 60 amps), and UL class “H” ( 65 amps and above).
  • 4 Conductor data in this section specifies conductor size (excluding flexible cord or cable) between the panelboard and the equipment per NEC Table 310.16. If a flexible cord or cable is used, minimum conductor size may increase. See NEC Table 400.5(A) for flexible cord and cable requirements.
  • ###################### Failure to follow these electrical service guide recommendations could create an electric shock or fire hazard. These recommendations are for a dedicated branch circuit sized for the rated output and duty cycle of the welding power source.

    |Input Voltage (V)|Single-Phase|Single-Phase|Single-Phase|Single-Phase| |---|---|---|---|---| |Input Voltage (V)|208|230|460|575| |Input Amperes (A) At Rated Output - 225 amps @ 29 volts|47|43|21|16| |Max Recommended Standard Fuse Rating In Amperes1 Time-Delay Fuses2 Normal Operating Fuses3

    |50 70|50 60

    |25 30|20 25

    | |Min Input Conductor Size In AWG4|8|8|12|14| |Max Recommended Input Conductor Length In Feet (Meters)|88 (27)|108 (33)|172 (52)|174 (53)| |Min Grounding Conductor Size In AWG4|8|10|12|14|

    Reference: 2008 National Electrical Code (NEC) (including article 630)

  • 1 If a circuit breaker is used in place of a fuse, choose a circuit breaker with time-current curves comparable to the recommended fuse.
  • 2 “Time-Delay” fuses are UL class “RK5” . See UL 248.
  • 3 “Normal Operating” (general purpose - no intentional delay) fuses are UL class “K5” (up to and including 60 amps), and UL class “H” ( 65 amps and above).
  • 4 Conductor data in this section specifies conductor size (excluding flexible cord or cable) between the panelboard and the equipment per NEC Table 310.16. If a flexible cord or cable is used, minimum conductor size may increase. See NEC Table 400.5(A) for flexible cord and cable requirements.
  • ############### B. Maxstar 350 Models

    Actual input voltage should not be 10% less than minimum (5% for 380 volt CE models) and/or 10% more than maximum input voltages listed in table. If actual input voltage is outside this range, output may not be be available.

    NOTICE − INCORRECT INPUT POWER can damage this welding power source. Phase to ground voltage shall not exceed +10% of rated input voltage.

    ###################### Failure to follow these electrical service guide recommendations could create an electric shock or fire hazard. These recommendations are for a dedicated branch circuit sized for the rated output and duty cycle of the welding power source.

    |Input Voltage (V)|Three-Phase|Three-Phase|Three-Phase|Three-Phase|Three-Phase|Three-Phase| |---|---|---|---|---|---|---| |Input Voltage (V)|208|230|380|400|460|575|

    Page 41

    |Input Amperes (A) At Rated Output - 300 amps @ 32 volts|33|30|18|17|15|12| |Max Recommended Standard Fuse Rating In Amperes1 Time-Delay Fuses2 Normal Operating Fuses3|40 50

    |35 45|20 25

    |20 25

    |15 20|15 20

    | |Min Input Conductor Size In AWG4|10|10|14|14|14|14| |Max Recommended Input Conductor Length In Feet (Meters)|93 (28)|113 (35)|121 (37)|134 (41)|177 (54)|276 (84)| |Min Grounding Conductor Size In AWG4|10|10|14|14|14|14|

    Reference: 2008 National Electrical Code (NEC) (including article 630)

  • 1 If a circuit breaker is used in place of a fuse, choose a circuit breaker with time-current curves comparable to the recommended fuse.
  • 2 “Time-Delay” fuses are UL class “RK5” . See UL 248.
  • 3 “Normal Operating” (general purpose - no intentional delay) fuses are UL class “K5” (up to and including 60 amps), and UL class “H” ( 65 amps and above).
  • 4 Conductor data in this section specifies conductor size (excluding flexible cord or cable) between the panelboard and the equipment per NEC Table 310.16. If a flexible cord or cable is used, minimum conductor size may increase. See NEC Table 400.5(A) for flexible cord and cable requirements.
  • ###################### Failure to follow these electrical service guide recommendations could create an electric shock or fire hazard. These recommendations are for a dedicated branch circuit sized for the rated output and duty cycle of the welding power source.

    |Input Voltage (V)|Single-Phase|Single-Phase|Single-Phase|Single-Phase| |---|---|---|---|---| |Input Voltage (V)|208|230|460|575| |Input Amperes (A) At Rated Output - 225 amps @ 29 volts|43|39|19|14| |Max Recommended Standard Fuse Rating In Amperes1 Time-Delay Fuses2 Normal Operating Fuses3

    |50 60|45 60

    |20 30

    |15 20

    | |Min Input Conductor Size In AWG4|8|10|14|14| |Max Recommended Input Conductor Length In Feet (Meters)|99 (30)|79 (24)|124 (38)|194 (59)| |Min Grounding Conductor Size In AWG4|10|10|14|14|

    Reference: 2008 National Electrical Code (NEC) (including article 630)

  • 1 If a circuit breaker is used in place of a fuse, choose a circuit breaker with time-current curves comparable to the recommended fuse.
  • 2 “Time-Delay” fuses are UL class “RK5” . See UL 248.
  • 3 “Normal Operating” (general purpose - no intentional delay) fuses are UL class “K5” (up to and including 60 amps), and UL class “H” ( 65 amps and above).
  • 4 Conductor data in this section specifies conductor size (excluding flexible cord or cable) between the panelboard and the equipment per NEC Table 310.16. If a flexible cord or cable is used, minimum conductor size may increase. See NEC Table 400.5(A) for flexible cord and cable requirements.
  • ############### C. Dynasty 700 Models

    Actual input voltage should not be 10% less than minimum (5% for 380 volt CE models) and/or 10% more than maximum input voltages listed in table. If actual input voltage is outside this range, output may not be be available.

    Page 42

    NOTICE − INCORRECT INPUT POWER can damage this welding power source. Phase to ground voltage shall not exceed +10% of rated input voltage.

    ###################### Failure to follow these electrical service guide recommendations could create an electric shock or fire hazard. These recommendations are for a dedicated branch circuit sized for the rated output and duty cycle of the welding power source.

    |Input Voltage (V)|Three-Phase|Three-Phase|Three-Phase|Three-Phase|Three-Phase|Three-Phase| |---|---|---|---|---|---|---| |Input Voltage (V)|208|230|380|400|460|575| |Input Amperes (A) At Rated Output - 600 amps @ 44 volts|98|88|53|51|44|33| |Max Recommended Standard Fuse Rating In Amperes1 Time-Delay Fuses2 Normal Operating Fuses3|110 150

    |100 125|60 80

    |60 80

    |50 70|40 50

    | |Min Input Conductor Size In AWG4|4|4|8|8|8|10| |Max Recommended Input Conductor Length In Feet (Meters)|118 (36)|144 (44)|160 (49)|177 (54)|235 (72)|240 (73)| |Min Grounding Conductor Size In AWG4|6|6|8|8|8|10|

    Reference: 2008 National Electrical Code (NEC) (including article 630) 1 If a circuit breaker is used in place of a fuse, choose a circuit breaker with time-current curves comparable to the recommended fuse. 2 “Time-Delay” fuses are UL class “RK5” . See UL 248. 3 “Normal Operating” (general purpose - no intentional delay) fuses are UL class “K5” (up to and including 60 amps), and UL class “H” ( 65 amps and

    above).

    4 Conductor data in this section specifies conductor size (excluding flexible cord or cable) between the panelboard and the equipment per NEC Table 310.16. If a flexible cord or cable is used, minimum conductor size may increase. See NEC Table 400.5(A) for flexible cord and cable requirements.

    ###################### Failure to follow these electrical service guide recommendations could create an electric shock or fire hazard. These recommendations are for a dedicated branch circuit sized for the rated output and duty cycle of the welding power source.

    |Input Voltage (V)|Single-Phase|Single-Phase|Single-Phase|Single-Phase| |---|---|---|---|---| |Input Voltage (V)|208|230|460|575| |Input Amperes (A) At Rated Output - 450 amps @ 38 volts|119|105|50|38| |Max Recommended Standard Fuse Rating In Amperes1 Time-Delay Fuses2 Normal Operating Fuses3|125 175

    |125 150

    |60 80|50 60

    | |Min Input Conductor Size In AWG4|3|4|8|8| |Max Recommended Input Conductor Length In Feet (Meters)|107 (33)|107 (33)|178 (54)|279 (85)| |Min Grounding Conductor Size In AWG4|6|6|8|10|

    ############### D. Maxstar 700 Models

    Actual input voltage should not be 10% less than minimum (5% for 380 volt CE models) and/or 10% more than maximum input voltages listed in table. If actual input voltage is outside this range, output may not be be available.

    NOTICE − INCORRECT INPUT POWER can damage this welding power source. Phase to ground voltage shall not exceed +10% of rated input voltage.

    ###################### Failure to follow these electrical service guide recommendations could create an electric shock or fire hazard. These recommendations are for a dedicated branch circuit sized for the rated output and duty cycle of the welding power source.

    Page 43

    |Input Voltage (V)|Three-Phase|Three-Phase|Three-Phase|Three-Phase|Three-Phase|Three-Phase| |---|---|---|---|---|---|---| |Input Voltage (V)|208|230|380|400|460|575| |Input Amperes (A) At Rated Output - 600 amps @ 44 volts|89|80|49|46|40|31| |Max Recommended Standard Fuse Rating In Amperes1 Time-Delay Fuses2 Normal Operating Fuses3|110 125

    |100 125|60 70

    |50 70

    |50 60|40 50

    | |Min Input Conductor Size In AWG4|4|6|8|8|8|10| |Max Recommended Input Conductor Length In Feet (Meters)|129 (39)|101 (31)|175 (53)|194 (59)|257 (78)|263 (80)| |Min Grounding Conductor Size In AWG4|6|6|8|8|10|10|

    Reference: 2008 National Electrical Code (NEC) (including article 630) 1 If a circuit breaker is used in place of a fuse, choose a circuit breaker with time-current curves comparable to the recommended fuse. 2 “Time-Delay” fuses are UL class “RK5” . See UL 248. 3 “Normal Operating” (general purpose - no intentional delay) fuses are UL class “K5” (up to and including 60 amps), and UL class “H” ( 65 amps and

    above).

    4 Conductor data in this section specifies conductor size (excluding flexible cord or cable) between the panelboard and the equipment per NEC Table 310.16. If a flexible cord or cable is used, minimum conductor size may increase. See NEC Table 400.5(A) for flexible cord and cable requirements.

    ###################### Failure to follow these electrical service guide recommendations could create an electric shock or fire hazard. These recommendations are for a dedicated branch circuit sized for the rated output and duty cycle of the welding power source.

    |Input Voltage (V)|Single-Phase|Single-Phase|Single-Phase|Single-Phase| |---|---|---|---|---| |Input Voltage (V)|208|230|460|575| |Input Amperes (A) At Rated Output - 450 amps @ 38 volts|108|95|45|35| |Max Recommended Standard Fuse Rating In Amperes1 Time-Delay Fuses2 Normal Operating Fuses3|125 150

    |110 150

    |50 70|45 60

    | |Min Input Conductor Size In AWG4|4|4|8|10| |Max Recommended Input Conductor Length In Feet (Meters)|94 (29)|115 (35)|189 (58)|194 (59)| |Min Grounding Conductor Size In AWG4|6|6|8|10|

    ############ 4-10. Connecting Input Power For 350 Models

    | | | | | |---|---|---|---|

  • A. Connecting Three-Phase Input Power
  • | | | |! Installation must meet all National and Local Codes − have only qualified persons make this installation.

    3|

    Page 44

    |---|---|---|---| |Tools Needed:

    Ref. 804 746-B

    ! Disconnect and lockout/tagout input power before connecting input conductors from unit.

    ! Always connect green or green/ yellow conductor to supply grounding terminal first, and never to a line terminal.

    The Auto-Line circuitry in this unit automatically adapts the power source to the primary voltage being applied. Check input voltage available at site. This unit can be connected to any input power between 208 and 575 VAC without removing cover to relink the power source.

    For Three-Phase Operation

    1 Input Power Cord.
    2 Disconnect Device (switch shown in the OFF position)
    3 Green Or Green/Yellow Grounding Conductor
    4 Disconnect Device Grounding Terminal
    5 Input Conductors (L1, L2 And L3)
    6 Disconnect Device Line Terminals

    Connect green or green/yellow grounding conductor to disconnect device grounding terminal first.

    Connect input conductors L1, L2, and L3 to disconnect device line terminals.

    7 Over-Current Protection


    Select type and size of over-current protection using Section 4-9 (fused disconnect switch shown).

    Close and secure door on disconnect device. Remove lockout/tagout device, and place switch in the On position.

    |L1 L2 L3| | |---|---| |L1 L2 L3| |

    2

    1

    3

    4

    5

    6

    7|Tools Needed:

    Ref. 804 746-B

    ! Disconnect and lockout/tagout input power before connecting input conductors from unit.

    ! Always connect green or green/ yellow conductor to supply grounding terminal first, and never to a line terminal.

    The Auto-Line circuitry in this unit automatically adapts the power source to the primary voltage being applied. Check input voltage available at site. This unit can be connected to any input power between 208 and 575 VAC without removing cover to relink the power source.

    For Three-Phase Operation

    1 Input Power Cord.
    2 Disconnect Device (switch shown in the OFF position)
    3 Green Or Green/Yellow Grounding Conductor
    4 Disconnect Device Grounding Terminal
    5 Input Conductors (L1, L2 And L3)
    6 Disconnect Device Line Terminals

    Connect green or green/yellow grounding conductor to disconnect device grounding terminal first.

    Connect input conductors L1, L2, and L3 to disconnect device line terminals.

    7 Over-Current Protection


    Select type and size of over-current protection using Section 4-9 (fused disconnect switch shown).

    Close and secure door on disconnect device. Remove lockout/tagout device, and place switch in the On position.

    |L1 L2 L3| | |---|---| |L1 L2 L3| |

    2

    1

    3

    4

    5

    6

    7|Tools Needed:

    Ref. 804 746-B

    ! Disconnect and lockout/tagout input power before connecting input conductors from unit.

    ! Always connect green or green/ yellow conductor to supply grounding terminal first, and never to a line terminal.

    The Auto-Line circuitry in this unit automatically adapts the power source to the primary voltage being applied. Check input voltage available at site. This unit can be connected to any input power between 208 and 575 VAC without removing cover to relink the power source.

    For Three-Phase Operation

    1 Input Power Cord.
    2 Disconnect Device (switch shown in the OFF position)
    3 Green Or Green/Yellow Grounding Conductor
    4 Disconnect Device Grounding Terminal
    5 Input Conductors (L1, L2 And L3)
    6 Disconnect Device Line Terminals

    Connect green or green/yellow grounding conductor to disconnect device grounding terminal first.

    Connect input conductors L1, L2, and L3 to disconnect device line terminals.

    7 Over-Current Protection


    Select type and size of over-current protection using Section 4-9 (fused disconnect switch shown).

    Close and secure door on disconnect device. Remove lockout/tagout device, and place switch in the On position.

    |L1 L2 L3| | |---|---| |L1 L2 L3| |

    2

    1

    3

    4

    5

    6

    7|Tools Needed:

    Ref. 804 746-B

    ! Disconnect and lockout/tagout input power before connecting input conductors from unit.

    ! Always connect green or green/ yellow conductor to supply grounding terminal first, and never to a line terminal.

    The Auto-Line circuitry in this unit automatically adapts the power source to the primary voltage being applied. Check input voltage available at site. This unit can be connected to any input power between 208 and 575 VAC without removing cover to relink the power source.

    For Three-Phase Operation

    1 Input Power Cord.
    2 Disconnect Device (switch shown in the OFF position)
    3 Green Or Green/Yellow Grounding Conductor
    4 Disconnect Device Grounding Terminal
    5 Input Conductors (L1, L2 And L3)
    6 Disconnect Device Line Terminals

    Connect green or green/yellow grounding conductor to disconnect device grounding terminal first.

    Connect input conductors L1, L2, and L3 to disconnect device line terminals.

    7 Over-Current Protection


    Select type and size of over-current protection using Section 4-9 (fused disconnect switch shown).

    Close and secure door on disconnect device. Remove lockout/tagout device, and place switch in the On position.

    |L1 L2 L3| | |---|---| |L1 L2 L3| |

    2

    1

    3

    4

    5

    6

    7|

    ############### B. Connecting Single-Phase Input Power

    | | | |! Installation must meet all National and Local Codes − have only qualified persons make this installation.| |---|---|---|---| |! Disconnect and lockout/tagout input power before connecting input conductors from unit.

    ! Always connect green or green/ yellow conductor to supply grounding terminal first, and never to a line terminal.

    The Auto-Line circuitry in this unit automatically adapts the power source to the primary voltage being applied. Check input voltage available at site. This unit can be connected to any input power between 208 and 575 VAC without removing cover to relink the power source.

    1 Black And White Input Conductor (L1 And L2)
    2 Red Input Conductor
    3 Green Or Green/Yellow Grounding Conductor
    4 Insulation Sleeving
    5 Electrical Tape

    Insulate and isolate red conductor as shown.

    6 Input Power Cord.
    7 Disconnect Device (switch shown in the OFF position)
    8 Disconnect Device Grounding Terminal
    9 Disconnect Device Line Terminals

    Connect green or green/yellow grounding conductor to disconnect device grounding terminal first.

    Connect input conductors L1 and L2 to disconnect device line terminals.

    10 Over-Current Protection


    Select type and size of over-current protection using Section 4-9 (fused disconnect switch shown).

    Close and secure door on disconnect device. Remove lockout/tagout device, and place switch in the On position.

    1

    6

    5

    4

    2

    7

    6

    L1 L2

    1

    =GND/PE Earth Ground

    3

    3

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    1

    8

    9
    10


    Tools Needed:

    Ref. 804 746-B / 803 766-A|! Disconnect and lockout/tagout input power before connecting input conductors from unit.

    ! Always connect green or green/ yellow conductor to supply grounding terminal first, and never to a line terminal.

    The Auto-Line circuitry in this unit automatically adapts the power source to the primary voltage being applied. Check input voltage available at site. This unit can be connected to any input power between 208 and 575 VAC without removing cover to relink the power source.

    1 Black And White Input Conductor (L1 And L2)
    2 Red Input Conductor
    3 Green Or Green/Yellow Grounding Conductor
    4 Insulation Sleeving
    5 Electrical Tape

    Insulate and isolate red conductor as shown.

    6 Input Power Cord.
    7 Disconnect Device (switch shown in the OFF position)
    8 Disconnect Device Grounding Terminal
    9 Disconnect Device Line Terminals

    Connect green or green/yellow grounding conductor to disconnect device grounding terminal first.

    Connect input conductors L1 and L2 to disconnect device line terminals.

    10 Over-Current Protection


    Select type and size of over-current protection using Section 4-9 (fused disconnect switch shown).

    Close and secure door on disconnect device. Remove lockout/tagout device, and place switch in the On position.

    1

    6

    5

    4

    2

    7

    6

    L1 L2

    1

    =GND/PE Earth Ground

    3

    3

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    1

    8

    9
    10


    Tools Needed:

    Ref. 804 746-B / 803 766-A|! Disconnect and lockout/tagout input power before connecting input conductors from unit.

    ! Always connect green or green/ yellow conductor to supply grounding terminal first, and never to a line terminal.

    The Auto-Line circuitry in this unit automatically adapts the power source to the primary voltage being applied. Check input voltage available at site. This unit can be connected to any input power between 208 and 575 VAC without removing cover to relink the power source.

    1 Black And White Input Conductor (L1 And L2)
    2 Red Input Conductor
    3 Green Or Green/Yellow Grounding Conductor
    4 Insulation Sleeving
    5 Electrical Tape

    Insulate and isolate red conductor as shown.

    6 Input Power Cord.
    7 Disconnect Device (switch shown in the OFF position)
    8 Disconnect Device Grounding Terminal
    9 Disconnect Device Line Terminals

    Connect green or green/yellow grounding conductor to disconnect device grounding terminal first.

    Connect input conductors L1 and L2 to disconnect device line terminals.

    10 Over-Current Protection


    Select type and size of over-current protection using Section 4-9 (fused disconnect switch shown).

    Close and secure door on disconnect device. Remove lockout/tagout device, and place switch in the On position.

    1

    6

    5

    4

    2

    7

    6

    L1 L2

    1

    =GND/PE Earth Ground

    3

    3

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    1

    8

    9
    10


    Tools Needed:

    Ref. 804 746-B / 803 766-A|! Disconnect and lockout/tagout input power before connecting input conductors from unit.

    ! Always connect green or green/ yellow conductor to supply grounding terminal first, and never to a line terminal.

    The Auto-Line circuitry in this unit automatically adapts the power source to the primary voltage being applied. Check input voltage available at site. This unit can be connected to any input power between 208 and 575 VAC without removing cover to relink the power source.

    1 Black And White Input Conductor (L1 And L2)
    2 Red Input Conductor
    3 Green Or Green/Yellow Grounding Conductor
    4 Insulation Sleeving
    5 Electrical Tape

    Insulate and isolate red conductor as shown.

    6 Input Power Cord.
    7 Disconnect Device (switch shown in the OFF position)
    8 Disconnect Device Grounding Terminal
    9 Disconnect Device Line Terminals

    Connect green or green/yellow grounding conductor to disconnect device grounding terminal first.

    Connect input conductors L1 and L2 to disconnect device line terminals.

    10 Over-Current Protection


    Select type and size of over-current protection using Section 4-9 (fused disconnect switch shown).

    Close and secure door on disconnect device. Remove lockout/tagout device, and place switch in the On position.

    1

    6

    5

    4

    2

    7

    6

    L1 L2

    1

    =GND/PE Earth Ground

    3

    3

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    1

    8

    9
    10


    Tools Needed:

    Ref. 804 746-B / 803 766-A|

    ############ 4-11. Connecting Input Power For 700 Models

    | | | | | |---|---|---|---|

    Page 45

  • A. Connecting Three-Phase Input Power For Maxstar 700 Models
  • | | | |! Installation must meet all National and Local Codes − have only qualified persons make this installation.

    5 6

    | |---|---|---|---| |Tools Needed:

    805 473-A

    ! Disconnect and lockout/tagout input power before connecting input conductors from unit.

    ! Make input power connections to the

    welding power source first.

    ! Always connect green or green/yellow conductor to supply grounding terminal first, and never to a line terminal.

    See rating label on unit and check input voltage available at site (see Section 4-6).

    1 Input Power Conductors (Customer Supplied Cord)

    Select size and length of conductors using Section 4-9. Conductors must comply with national, state, and local electrical codes. If applicable, use lugs of proper amperage capacity and correct hole size.

    Welding Power Source Input Power Connections

    2 Strain Relief

    Route conductors (cord) through strain relief and tighten screws.

    3 Machine Grounding Terminal
    4 Green Or Green/Yellow Grounding Conductor

    Connect green or green/yellow grounding conductor to welding power source grounding terminal first.

    5 Welding Power Source Line Terminals (Switch S1)
    6 Input Conductors L1 (U), L2 (V) And L3 (W)

    Connect input conductors L1 (U), L2 (V) and L3 (W) to welding power source line terminals.

    7 Cable Tie (CE Only) Secure wires with supplied cable tie. Install cover. Disconnect Device Input Power Connections
    8 Disconnect Device (switch shown in OFF position)
    9 Disconnect Device (Supply) Grounding Terminal

    Connect green or green/yellow grounding conductor to disconnect device grounding terminal first.

    10 Disconnect Device Line Terminals

    Connect input conductors L1 (U), L2 (V) And L3 (W) to disconnect device line terminals.

    11 Over-Current Protection


    Select type and size of over-current protection using Section 4-9 (fused disconnect switch shown).

    Close and secure door on line disconnect device. Remove lockout/tagout device, and place switch in the On position.

    1

    3

    4

    4

    9

    8

    11

    6

    10

    3

    = GND/PE Earth Ground

    2

    7

    |Tools Needed:

    805 473-A

    ! Disconnect and lockout/tagout input power before connecting input conductors from unit.

    ! Make input power connections to the

    welding power source first.

    ! Always connect green or green/yellow conductor to supply grounding terminal first, and never to a line terminal.

    See rating label on unit and check input voltage available at site (see Section 4-6).

    1 Input Power Conductors (Customer Supplied Cord)

    Select size and length of conductors using Section 4-9. Conductors must comply with national, state, and local electrical codes. If applicable, use lugs of proper amperage capacity and correct hole size.

    Welding Power Source Input Power Connections

    2 Strain Relief

    Route conductors (cord) through strain relief and tighten screws.

    3 Machine Grounding Terminal
    4 Green Or Green/Yellow Grounding Conductor

    Connect green or green/yellow grounding conductor to welding power source grounding terminal first.

    5 Welding Power Source Line Terminals (Switch S1)
    6 Input Conductors L1 (U), L2 (V) And L3 (W)

    Connect input conductors L1 (U), L2 (V) and L3 (W) to welding power source line terminals.

    7 Cable Tie (CE Only) Secure wires with supplied cable tie. Install cover. Disconnect Device Input Power Connections
    8 Disconnect Device (switch shown in OFF position)
    9 Disconnect Device (Supply) Grounding Terminal

    Connect green or green/yellow grounding conductor to disconnect device grounding terminal first.

    10 Disconnect Device Line Terminals

    Connect input conductors L1 (U), L2 (V) And L3 (W) to disconnect device line terminals.

    11 Over-Current Protection


    Select type and size of over-current protection using Section 4-9 (fused disconnect switch shown).

    Close and secure door on line disconnect device. Remove lockout/tagout device, and place switch in the On position.

    1

    3

    4

    4

    9

    8

    11

    6

    10

    3

    = GND/PE Earth Ground

    2

    7

    |Tools Needed:

    805 473-A

    ! Disconnect and lockout/tagout input power before connecting input conductors from unit.

    ! Make input power connections to the

    welding power source first.

    ! Always connect green or green/yellow conductor to supply grounding terminal first, and never to a line terminal.

    See rating label on unit and check input voltage available at site (see Section 4-6).

    1 Input Power Conductors (Customer Supplied Cord)

    Select size and length of conductors using Section 4-9. Conductors must comply with national, state, and local electrical codes. If applicable, use lugs of proper amperage capacity and correct hole size.

    Welding Power Source Input Power Connections

    2 Strain Relief

    Route conductors (cord) through strain relief and tighten screws.

    3 Machine Grounding Terminal
    4 Green Or Green/Yellow Grounding Conductor

    Connect green or green/yellow grounding conductor to welding power source grounding terminal first.

    5 Welding Power Source Line Terminals (Switch S1)
    6 Input Conductors L1 (U), L2 (V) And L3 (W)

    Connect input conductors L1 (U), L2 (V) and L3 (W) to welding power source line terminals.

    7 Cable Tie (CE Only) Secure wires with supplied cable tie. Install cover. Disconnect Device Input Power Connections
    8 Disconnect Device (switch shown in OFF position)
    9 Disconnect Device (Supply) Grounding Terminal

    Connect green or green/yellow grounding conductor to disconnect device grounding terminal first.

    10 Disconnect Device Line Terminals

    Connect input conductors L1 (U), L2 (V) And L3 (W) to disconnect device line terminals.

    11 Over-Current Protection


    Select type and size of over-current protection using Section 4-9 (fused disconnect switch shown).

    Close and secure door on line disconnect device. Remove lockout/tagout device, and place switch in the On position.

    1

    3

    4

    4

    9

    8

    11

    6

    10

    3

    = GND/PE Earth Ground

    2

    7

    |Tools Needed:

    805 473-A

    ! Disconnect and lockout/tagout input power before connecting input conductors from unit.

    ! Make input power connections to the

    welding power source first.

    ! Always connect green or green/yellow conductor to supply grounding terminal first, and never to a line terminal.

    See rating label on unit and check input voltage available at site (see Section 4-6).

    1 Input Power Conductors (Customer Supplied Cord)

    Select size and length of conductors using Section 4-9. Conductors must comply with national, state, and local electrical codes. If applicable, use lugs of proper amperage capacity and correct hole size.

    Welding Power Source Input Power Connections

    2 Strain Relief

    Route conductors (cord) through strain relief and tighten screws.

    3 Machine Grounding Terminal
    4 Green Or Green/Yellow Grounding Conductor

    Connect green or green/yellow grounding conductor to welding power source grounding terminal first.

    5 Welding Power Source Line Terminals (Switch S1)
    6 Input Conductors L1 (U), L2 (V) And L3 (W)

    Connect input conductors L1 (U), L2 (V) and L3 (W) to welding power source line terminals.

    7 Cable Tie (CE Only) Secure wires with supplied cable tie. Install cover. Disconnect Device Input Power Connections
    8 Disconnect Device (switch shown in OFF position)
    9 Disconnect Device (Supply) Grounding Terminal

    Connect green or green/yellow grounding conductor to disconnect device grounding terminal first.

    10 Disconnect Device Line Terminals

    Connect input conductors L1 (U), L2 (V) And L3 (W) to disconnect device line terminals.

    11 Over-Current Protection


    Select type and size of over-current protection using Section 4-9 (fused disconnect switch shown).

    Close and secure door on line disconnect device. Remove lockout/tagout device, and place switch in the On position.

    1

    3

    4

    4

    9

    8

    11

    6

    10

    3

    = GND/PE Earth Ground

    2

    7

    |

    ############### B. Connecting Three-Phase Input Power For Dynasty 700 Models

    | | | |! Installation must meet all National and Local Codes − have only qualified persons make this installation.

    6 7

    | |---|---|---|---| |Tools Needed:

    805 470-B

    ! Disconnect and lockout/tagout input power before connecting input conductors from unit.

    ! Make input power connections to the

    welding power source first.

    ! Always connect green or green/yellow conductor to supply grounding terminal first, and never to a line terminal.

    See rating label on unit and check input voltage available at site (see Section 4-6).

    1 Input Power Conductors (Customer Supplied Cord)

    Select size and length of conductors using Section 4-9. Conductors must comply with national, state, and local electrical codes. If applicable, use lugs of proper amperage capacity and correct hole size.

    Welding Power Source Input Power Connections

    2 Strain Relief

    Route conductors (cord) through strain relief and tighten screws.

    3 Machine Grounding Terminal
    4 Green Or Green/Yellow Grounding Conductor

    Connect green or green/yellow grounding conductor to welding power source grounding terminal first.

    5 Ferrite Core F9 (CE Only)

    For Dynasty models, wrap green/yellow grounding conductor through supplied ferrite F9 4 times as shown.

    6 Welding Power Source Line Terminals (Switch S1)
    7 Input Conductors L1 (U), L2 (V) And L3 (W)

    Connect input conductors L1 (U), L2 (V) and L3 (W) to welding power source line terminals.

    8 Cable Tie (CE Only) Secure wires with supplied cable tie. Install cover.

    Disconnect Device Input Power Connections

    9 Disconnect Device (switch shown in OFF position)
    10 Disconnect Device (Supply) Grounding Terminal

    Connect green or green/yellow grounding conductor to disconnect device grounding terminal first.

    11 Disconnect Device Line Terminals

    Connect input conductors L1 (U), L2 (V) And L3 (W) to disconnect device line terminals.

    12 Over-Current Protection


    Select type and size of over-current protection using Section 4-9 (fused disconnect switch shown).

    Close and secure door on line disconnect device. Remove lockout/tagout device, and place switch in the On position.

    1

    3

    4

    4

    10

    9

    12

    6

    11

    3

    = GND/PE Earth Ground

    2

    5

    8|Tools Needed:

    805 470-B

    ! Disconnect and lockout/tagout input power before connecting input conductors from unit.

    ! Make input power connections to the

    welding power source first.

    ! Always connect green or green/yellow conductor to supply grounding terminal first, and never to a line terminal.

    See rating label on unit and check input voltage available at site (see Section 4-6).

    1 Input Power Conductors (Customer Supplied Cord)

    Select size and length of conductors using Section 4-9. Conductors must comply with national, state, and local electrical codes. If applicable, use lugs of proper amperage capacity and correct hole size.

    Welding Power Source Input Power Connections

    2 Strain Relief

    Route conductors (cord) through strain relief and tighten screws.

    3 Machine Grounding Terminal
    4 Green Or Green/Yellow Grounding Conductor

    Connect green or green/yellow grounding conductor to welding power source grounding terminal first.

    5 Ferrite Core F9 (CE Only)

    For Dynasty models, wrap green/yellow grounding conductor through supplied ferrite F9 4 times as shown.

    6 Welding Power Source Line Terminals (Switch S1)
    7 Input Conductors L1 (U), L2 (V) And L3 (W)

    Connect input conductors L1 (U), L2 (V) and L3 (W) to welding power source line terminals.

    8 Cable Tie (CE Only) Secure wires with supplied cable tie. Install cover.

    Disconnect Device Input Power Connections

    9 Disconnect Device (switch shown in OFF position)
    10 Disconnect Device (Supply) Grounding Terminal

    Connect green or green/yellow grounding conductor to disconnect device grounding terminal first.

    11 Disconnect Device Line Terminals

    Connect input conductors L1 (U), L2 (V) And L3 (W) to disconnect device line terminals.

    12 Over-Current Protection


    Select type and size of over-current protection using Section 4-9 (fused disconnect switch shown).

    Close and secure door on line disconnect device. Remove lockout/tagout device, and place switch in the On position.

    1

    3

    4

    4

    10

    9

    12

    6

    11

    3

    = GND/PE Earth Ground

    2

    5

    8|Tools Needed:

    805 470-B

    ! Disconnect and lockout/tagout input power before connecting input conductors from unit.

    ! Make input power connections to the

    welding power source first.

    ! Always connect green or green/yellow conductor to supply grounding terminal first, and never to a line terminal.

    See rating label on unit and check input voltage available at site (see Section 4-6).

    1 Input Power Conductors (Customer Supplied Cord)

    Select size and length of conductors using Section 4-9. Conductors must comply with national, state, and local electrical codes. If applicable, use lugs of proper amperage capacity and correct hole size.

    Welding Power Source Input Power Connections

    2 Strain Relief

    Route conductors (cord) through strain relief and tighten screws.

    3 Machine Grounding Terminal
    4 Green Or Green/Yellow Grounding Conductor

    Connect green or green/yellow grounding conductor to welding power source grounding terminal first.

    5 Ferrite Core F9 (CE Only)

    For Dynasty models, wrap green/yellow grounding conductor through supplied ferrite F9 4 times as shown.

    6 Welding Power Source Line Terminals (Switch S1)
    7 Input Conductors L1 (U), L2 (V) And L3 (W)

    Connect input conductors L1 (U), L2 (V) and L3 (W) to welding power source line terminals.

    8 Cable Tie (CE Only) Secure wires with supplied cable tie. Install cover.

    Disconnect Device Input Power Connections

    9 Disconnect Device (switch shown in OFF position)
    10 Disconnect Device (Supply) Grounding Terminal

    Connect green or green/yellow grounding conductor to disconnect device grounding terminal first.

    11 Disconnect Device Line Terminals

    Connect input conductors L1 (U), L2 (V) And L3 (W) to disconnect device line terminals.

    12 Over-Current Protection


    Select type and size of over-current protection using Section 4-9 (fused disconnect switch shown).

    Close and secure door on line disconnect device. Remove lockout/tagout device, and place switch in the On position.

    1

    3

    4

    4

    10

    9

    12

    6

    11

    3

    = GND/PE Earth Ground

    2

    5

    8|Tools Needed:

    805 470-B

    ! Disconnect and lockout/tagout input power before connecting input conductors from unit.

    ! Make input power connections to the

    welding power source first.

    ! Always connect green or green/yellow conductor to supply grounding terminal first, and never to a line terminal.

    See rating label on unit and check input voltage available at site (see Section 4-6).

    1 Input Power Conductors (Customer Supplied Cord)

    Select size and length of conductors using Section 4-9. Conductors must comply with national, state, and local electrical codes. If applicable, use lugs of proper amperage capacity and correct hole size.

    Welding Power Source Input Power Connections

    2 Strain Relief

    Route conductors (cord) through strain relief and tighten screws.

    3 Machine Grounding Terminal
    4 Green Or Green/Yellow Grounding Conductor

    Connect green or green/yellow grounding conductor to welding power source grounding terminal first.

    5 Ferrite Core F9 (CE Only)

    For Dynasty models, wrap green/yellow grounding conductor through supplied ferrite F9 4 times as shown.

    6 Welding Power Source Line Terminals (Switch S1)
    7 Input Conductors L1 (U), L2 (V) And L3 (W)

    Connect input conductors L1 (U), L2 (V) and L3 (W) to welding power source line terminals.

    8 Cable Tie (CE Only) Secure wires with supplied cable tie. Install cover.

    Disconnect Device Input Power Connections

    9 Disconnect Device (switch shown in OFF position)
    10 Disconnect Device (Supply) Grounding Terminal

    Connect green or green/yellow grounding conductor to disconnect device grounding terminal first.

    11 Disconnect Device Line Terminals

    Connect input conductors L1 (U), L2 (V) And L3 (W) to disconnect device line terminals.

    12 Over-Current Protection


    Select type and size of over-current protection using Section 4-9 (fused disconnect switch shown).

    Close and secure door on line disconnect device. Remove lockout/tagout device, and place switch in the On position.

    1

    3

    4

    4

    10

    9

    12

    6

    11

    3

    = GND/PE Earth Ground

    2

    5

    8|

    ############### C. Connecting Single-Phase Input Power

    2

    56

    4

    2

    1

    3

    ############# 1

    8

    =GND/PE Earth Ground

    10

    Page 46

    7

    9

    6

    4

    Tools Needed:

    ! Installation must meet all National and Local Codes − have only qualified persons make this installation.

    ! Disconnect and lockout/tagout input power before connecting input conductors from unit.

    ! Make input power connections to the welding power source first.

    ! Always connect green or green/ yellow conductor to supply grounding terminal first, and never to a line terminal.

    See rating label on unit and check input voltage available at site (see Section 4-6).

  • 1 Input Power Conductors (Customer Supplied Cord)
  • Select size and length of conductors using Section 4-9. Conductors must comply with national, state, and local electrical codes. If applicable, use lugs of proper amperage capacity and correct hole size.

    Welding Power Source Input Power Connections

  • 2 Strain Relief
  • Route conductors (cord) through strain relief and tighten screws.

  • 3 Machine Grounding Terminal
  • 4 Green Or Green/Yellow Grounding Conductor
  • Connect green or green/yellow grounding conductor to welding power source grounding terminal first.

  • 5 Welding Power Source Line Terminals (Switch S1)
  • 6 Input Conductors L1 (U) And L2 (V)
  • Connect input conductors L1 (U) And L2 (V) to welding power source line terminals.

    Page 47

    Install cover.

    Disconnect Device Input Power Connections

  • 7 Disconnect Device (switch shown in OFF position)
  • 8 Disconnect Device (Supply) Grounding Terminal
  • Connect green or green/yellow grounding conductor to disconnect device grounding terminal first.

  • 9 Disconnect Device Line Terminals
  • Connect input conductors L1 (U) And L2 (V) to disconnect device line terminals.

  • 10 Over-Current Protection
  • Select type and size of over-current protection using Section 4-9 (fused disconnect switch shown).

    Close and secure door on line disconnect device. Remove lockout/tagout device, and place switch in the On position.

    Ref. 803 927-D

    ############ 4-12. Weld Output Terminals And Selecting Cable Sizes*

    NOTICE − The Total Cable Length in Weld Circuit (see table below) is the combined length of both weld cables. For example, if the power source is 100 ft (30 m) from the workpiece, the total cable length in the weld circuit is 200 ft (2 cables x 100 ft). Use the 200 ft (60 m) column to determine cable size.

    |! Turn off power before connecting to weld output terminals.

    ! Do not use worn, damaged, undersized, or poorly spliced cables.

    Weld Output Terminals|Welding Amperes*

    |Weld Cable Size
    and Total Cable (Copper) Length in Weld Circuit Not Exceeding|Weld Cable Size and Total Cable (Copper) Length in Weld Circuit Not Exceeding|Weld Cable Size and Total Cable (Copper) Length in Weld Circuit Not Exceeding|Weld Cable Size** and Total Cable (Copper) Length in Weld Circuit Not Exceeding| |---|---|---|---|---|---| |! Turn off power before connecting to weld output terminals.

    ! Do not use worn, damaged, undersized, or poorly spliced cables.

    Weld Output Terminals|Welding Amperes*

    |100 ft (30 m) or Less
    |100 ft (30 m) or Less**|150 ft (45 m)|200 ft (60 m)| |! Turn off power before connecting to weld output terminals.

    ! Do not use worn, damaged, undersized, or poorly spliced cables.

    Weld Output Terminals|Welding Amperes***

    |10 − 60% Duty Cycle

    AWG (mm2)|60 − 100% Duty Cycle

    AWG (mm2)|10 − 100% Duty Cycle AWG (mm2)|10 − 100% Duty Cycle AWG (mm2)| |Work

    Electrode

    |100|4 (20)|4 (20)|4 (20)|3 (30)| |Work

    Electrode

    |150|3 (30)|3 (30)|2 (35)|1 (50)| |Work

    Electrode

    |200|3 (30)|2 (35)|1 (50)|1/0 (60)| |Work

    Electrode

    |250|2 (35)|1 (50)|1/0 (60)|2/0 (70)| |Work

    Electrode

    |300|1 (50)|1/0 (60)|2/0 (70)|3/0 (95)| |Work

    Electrode

    |350|1/0 (60)|2/0 (70)|3/0 (95)|4/0 (120)| |Work

    Electrode

    |400|1/0 (60)|2/0 (70)|3/0 (95)|4/0 (120)| |Work

    Electrode

    |500|2/0 (70)|3/0 (95)|4/0 (120)|2 ea. 2/0 (2x70)|

    Page 48

    |Work

    Electrode

    |600|3/0 (95)|4/0 (120)|2 ea. 2/0 (2x70)|2 ea. 3/0 (2x95)| |Work

    Electrode

    |700|4/0 (120)|2 ea. 2/0 (2x70)|2 ea. 3/0 (2x95)|2 ea. 4/0 (2x120)| |Work

    Electrode

    |800|4/0 (120)|2 ea. 2/0 (2x70)|2 ea. 3/0 (2x95)|2 ea. 4/0 (2x120)| |Work

    Electrode

    |900|2 ea. 2/0 (2x70)|2 ea. 3/0 (2x95)|2 ea. 4/0 (2x120)|3 ea. 3/0 (3x95)| |* This chart is a general guideline and may not suit all applications. If cable overheats, use next size larger cable.
    Weld cable size (AWG) is based on either a 4 volts or less drop or a current density of at least 300 circular mils per ampere. ( ) = mm2 for metric use


    * Select weld cable size for pulsing application at peak amperage value.

    **For distances longer than 100 ft (30 m) and up to 200 ft (60 m), use direct current (DC) output only. For distances longer than those shown in this guide, call a factory applications rep. at 920-735-4505 (Miller) or 1-800-332-3281 (Hobart).

    Ref. S-0007-G 2010−08 (TIG)|* This chart is a general guideline and may not suit all applications. If cable overheats, use next size larger cable.
    Weld cable size (AWG) is based on either a 4 volts or less drop or a current density of at least 300 circular mils per ampere. ( ) = mm2 for metric use


    * Select weld cable size for pulsing application at peak amperage value.

    For distances longer than 100 ft (30 m) and up to 200 ft (60 m), use direct current (DC) output only. For distances longer than those shown in this guide, call a factory applications rep. at 920-735-4505 (Miller) or 1-800-332-3281 (Hobart).

    Ref. S-0007-G 2010−08 (TIG)|* This chart is a general guideline and may not suit all applications. If cable overheats, use next size larger cable.
    Weld cable size (AWG) is based on either a 4 volts or less drop or a current density of at least 300 circular mils per ampere. ( ) = mm2 for metric use


    * Select weld cable size for pulsing application at peak amperage value.

    For distances longer than 100 ft (30 m) and up to 200 ft (60 m), use direct current (DC) output only. For distances longer than those shown in this guide, call a factory applications rep. at 920-735-4505 (Miller) or 1-800-332-3281 (Hobart).

    Ref. S-0007-G 2010−08 (TIG)|* This chart is a general guideline and may not suit all applications. If cable overheats, use next size larger cable.
    Weld cable size (AWG) is based on either a 4 volts or less drop or a current density of at least 300 circular mils per ampere. ( ) = mm2 for metric use


    * Select weld cable size for pulsing application at peak amperage value.

    For distances longer than 100 ft (30 m) and up to 200 ft (60 m), use direct current (DC) output only. For distances longer than those shown in this guide, call a factory applications rep. at 920-735-4505 (Miller) or 1-800-332-3281 (Hobart).

    Ref. S-0007-G 2010−08 (TIG)|* This chart is a general guideline and may not suit all applications. If cable overheats, use next size larger cable.
    Weld cable size (AWG) is based on either a 4 volts or less drop or a current density of at least 300 circular mils per ampere. ( ) = mm2 for metric use


    * Select weld cable size for pulsing application at peak amperage value.

    For distances longer than 100 ft (30 m) and up to 200 ft (60 m), use direct current (DC) output only. For distances longer than those shown in this guide, call a factory applications rep. at 920-735-4505 (Miller) or 1-800-332-3281 (Hobart).

    Ref. S-0007-G 2010−08 (TIG)|* This chart is a general guideline and may not suit all applications. If cable overheats, use next size larger cable.
    Weld cable size (AWG) is based on either a 4 volts or less drop or a current density of at least 300 circular mils per ampere. ( ) = mm2 for metric use


    * Select weld cable size for pulsing application at peak amperage value.

    **For distances longer than 100 ft (30 m) and up to 200 ft (60 m), use direct current (DC) output only. For distances longer than those shown in this guide, call a factory applications rep. at 920-735-4505 (Miller) or 1-800-332-3281 (Hobart).

    Ref. S-0007-G 2010−08 (TIG)|

    Proceed to Section 4-13 For Additional Installation Instructions. A Dynasty 700 is illustrated in Sections 4-13 through 7-4. Location of controls and components is similar for all models covered in this manual.

    ############ 4-13. Remote 14 Receptacle Information (Used Without Automation Connection)

    |803 900-A / 218 716-A

    AJ

    B

    K I

    C L NH
    D M G E F
    | |Socket*|Socket Information| |---|---|---|---| |803 900-A / 218 716-A

    AJ

    B

    K I

    C L NH
    D M G E F
    |15 VOLTS DC|A|Contactor control, 15 volts DC.| |803 900-A / 218 716-A

    AJ

    B

    K I

    C L NH
    D M G E F
    |15 VOLTS DC|B|Contact closure to A completes 15 volts DC contactor control circuit, and enables output.| |803 900-A / 218 716-A

    AJ

    B

    K I

    C L NH
    D M G E F
    |REMOTE OUTPUT CONTROL|C|+10 volts DC.| |803 900-A / 218 716-A

    AJ

    B

    K I

    C L NH
    D M G E F
    |REMOTE OUTPUT CONTROL|D|Remote control circuit common.| |803 900-A / 218 716-A

    AJ

    B

    K I

    C L NH
    D M G E F
    |REMOTE OUTPUT CONTROL|E|0 to +10 volts DC input command signal from remote control.| |803 900-A / 218 716-A

    AJ

    B

    K I

    C L NH
    D M G E F
    |A/V AMPERAGE VOLTAGE|F|Current feedback; +1 volt DC per 100 amperes.| |803 900-A / 218 716-A

    AJ

    B

    K I

    C L NH
    D M G E F
    |A/V AMPERAGE VOLTAGE|H|Voltage feedback; +1 volt DC per 10 output receptacle volts.| |803 900-A / 218 716-A

    AJ

    B

    K I

    C L NH
    D M G E F
    |CHASSIS|K|Chassis common.| |803 900-A / 218 716-A

    AJ

    B

    K I

    C L NH
    D M G E F
    |GND|G|+15 volts DC (A) common.| |If a remote hand control, like the RHC-14, is connected to the Remote 14 receptacle, some current value above min. must be set on the remote control before the Panel or Remote contactor is turned on. Failure to do so will cause current to be controlled by the panel control, and the remote hand control will not function.

    * The remaining sockets are not used.|If a remote hand control, like the RHC-14, is connected to the Remote 14 receptacle, some current value above min. must be set on the remote control before the Panel or Remote contactor is turned on. Failure to do so will cause current to be controlled by the panel control, and the remote hand control will not function.

    * The remaining sockets are not used.|If a remote hand control, like the RHC-14, is connected to the Remote 14 receptacle, some current value above min. must be set on the remote control before the Panel or Remote contactor is turned on. Failure to do so will cause current to be controlled by the panel control, and the remote hand control will not function.

    * The remaining sockets are not used.|If a remote hand control, like the RHC-14, is connected to the Remote 14 receptacle, some current value above min. must be set on the remote control before the Panel or Remote contactor is turned on. Failure to do so will cause current to be controlled by the panel control, and the remote hand control will not function.

    * The remaining sockets are not used.|

    ############ 4-14. Automation Connection (For 28-Pin Receptacle If Present)

    |803 900-A / 218 716-A

    1

    4

    9 15

    21 2628

    25

    20

    14

    8

    3 2 76 5

    13 12 11 10 19 18 17 16

    24 23 22 27|803 900-A / 218 716-A

    1

    4

    9 15

    21 2628

    25

    20

    14

    8

    3 2 76 5

    13 12 11 10 19 18 17 16

    24 23 22 27| |---|---| |Pin|Pin Information For 28-Pin Receptacle RC28| |1|Start/Stop - Closure to pin 8 starts the weld cycle. Opening closure stops weld cycle. During 2T operation, a momentary closure (greater than 100 ms, but less than 3/4 seconds) starts and stops weld output.| |2|Output enable - functional only in automation modes - Closure to pin 8 must be maintained at all times. If the closure between pins 2 and 8 is broken, an output disable occurs, Postflow begins to time out, and AUTO STOP will be displayed on the meters.| |3|Gas - Closure to pin 8 turns on gas. This input will override Postflow, but if a Preflow time is entered, the Preflow cycle will time out before arc initiation.| |4|Valid arc, collector - Output is on when the contactor is on and there is less than 50 load volts (see Section 4-17).| |5|Voltage feedback - +1 volt DC per 10 volts w/reference to pin 11.| |6|Current feedback - +1 volt DC per 100 amperes w/reference to pin 11.| |7|Not used| |8|IGND isolation common| |9|Valid arc, emitter - Output is on when the contactor is on and there is less than 50 load volts (see Section 4-17).|

    Page 49

    |10|Memory Select 2 - See Section 4-15.| |11|Remote control circuit common for pins 17 and 18| |12|Chassis common| |13|Pulse lockout, collector - Output is on when in Initial Amperage, Initial Slope, Final Slope, Final Amperage, and Pulsed Background time when the pulse frequency is less than 10 Hz (see Section 4-17).| |14|Pulse lockout, emitter - Output is on when in Initial Amperage, Initial Slope, Final Slope, Final Amperage, and Pulse Background time, when the pulse frequency is less than 10 Hz (see Section 4-17).| |15|Memory select 0 - See Section 4-15.| |16|Memory select 1 - See Section 4-15.| |17|Command signal from remote control - 0 to +10 volts DC input (do not use if pulse output is controlled by an external source).| |18|+10 volts DC for use with an external potentiometer| |19|HF disable - Disables high frequency when connected to pin 8.| |20|Automation enable 1 - See Section 4-16.| |21|Amperage EN common - See Section 4-16.| |22|Amperage EN command - See Section 4-16.| |23|Final slope, collector - Output is on when in Final Slope (see Section 4-17).| |24|Final slope, emitter - Output is on when in Final Slope (see Section 4-17).| |25|Automation enable 2 - See Section 4-16.| |26|Amperage EP command (Dynasty models only) - See Section 4-16.| |27|Amperage EP common (Dynasty models only) - See Section 4-16.| |28|Polarity (Dynasty models only) - See Section 4-16.|

    ############ 4-15. Remote Memory Select Inputs (For 28-Pin Receptacle If Present)

    |1

    4

    9 15

    21 2628

    25

    20

    14

    8

    3|28-Pin Receptacle RC28|28-Pin Receptacle RC28|28-Pin Receptacle RC28|28-Pin Receptacle RC28| |---|---|---|---|---| |1

    4

    9 15

    21 2628

    25

    20

    14

    8

    3|Socket Designations 0 = No Connection / 1 = Connected To Ground (Pin 8)|Socket Designations 0 = No Connection / 1 = Connected To Ground (Pin 8)|Socket Designations 0 = No Connection / 1 = Connected To Ground (Pin 8)|Socket Designations 0 = No Connection / 1 = Connected To Ground (Pin 8)| |1

    4

    9 15

    21 2628

    25

    20

    14

    8

    3|Function|15|16|10| |1

    4

    9 15

    21 2628

    25

    20

    14

    8

    3|Off|0|0|0| |1

    4

    9 15

    21 2628

    25

    20

    14

    8

    3|Memory 1|1|0|0| |1

    4

    9 15

    21 2628

    25

    20

    14

    8

    3|Memory 2|0|1|0| |1

    4

    9 15

    21 2628

    25

    20

    14

    8

    3|Memory 3|1|1|0| |1

    4

    9 15

    21 2628

    25

    20

    14

    8

    3|Memory 4|0|0|1| |1

    4

    9 15

    21 2628

    25

    20

    14

    8

    3|Memory 5|1|0|1| |1

    4

    9 15

    21 2628

    25

    20

    14

    8

    3|Memory 6|0|1|1| |1

    4

    9 15

    21 2628

    25

    20

    14

    8

    3|Memory 7|1|1|1|

    ############ 4-16. Automation Selections (For 28-Pin Receptacle If Present)

    Page 50

    |1

    4

    9 15

    21 2628

    25

    20

    14

    8

    3|28-Pin Receptacle RC28|28-Pin Receptacle RC28|28-Pin Receptacle RC28| |---|---|---|---| |1

    4

    9 15

    21 2628

    25

    20

    14

    8

    3|Socket Designation 0 = No Connection / 1 = Connected To Ground (Pin 8) X= Do Not Care|Socket Designation 0 = No Connection / 1 = Connected To Ground (Pin 8) X= Do Not Care|Socket Designation 0 = No Connection / 1 = Connected To Ground (Pin 8) X= Do Not Care| |1

    4

    9 15

    21 2628

    25

    20

    14

    8

    3| |Pin|Pin| |1

    4

    9 15

    21 2628

    25

    20

    14

    8

    3|Function|20|25| |1

    4

    9 15

    21 2628

    25

    20

    14

    8

    3|No automation functions selected|0|0| |1

    4

    9 15

    21 2628

    25

    20

    14

    8

    3|Automation 1 Enables pin 2 function, Sequencer and weld timers|1|0| |Open (EN)

    Connected to pin 8 (EP)

    Pin 28|Automation 2 Enables pin 2 functions Pin 22 to pin 21 - 0 to +10 volts DC EN amplitude Pin 26 to pin 27 - 0 to +10 volts DC EP amplitude Pin 28 to pin 8 - EP polarity (Frequency and Balance) Pin 28 not connected to pin 8 - EN polarity (Frequency and Balance)|X|1|

    ############ 4-17. Typical Automation Application

    |R

    CR1

    +



    CR1 To User Equipment

    Typical 28-Pin Output Collector

    Emitter

    Coil resistance plus R should be chosen to limit current to 75 mA

    User supplied power up to 27 volts DC peak

    | |---|

    ############ 4-18. 115 Volts AC Duplex Receptacle, Supplementary Protector CB1, And PowerSwitch

    |803 901-A

    1 AC Duplex Receptacle

    Receptacle RC2 supplies 115 V 10 A of single-phase power.

    2 Supplementary Protector CB1

    CB1 protects duplex receptacle from overload. If circuit breaker opens, the receptacle does not work. Press button to reset protector.

    3 Power On/Off Switch


    1

    2

    3

    | |---|

    ############ 4-19. Gas Connections

    ![image 66](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile66.png)

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | |

    3 24 1

  • 1 Gas Fitting
  • Fittings have 5/8-18 right-hand threads.

  • 2 Cylinder Valve
  • Page 51

    Open valve slightly so gas flow blows dirt from valve. Close valve.

  • 3 Regulator/Flowmeter
  • 4 Flow Adjust
  • Typical flow rate is 15 cfh (cubic feet per hour).

    Connect customer supplied gas hose between regulator/flowmeter and gas fitting on rear of unit.

    Tools Needed: 11/16, 1-1/8 in.

    803 901-A

    ############ 4-20. TIG HF Impulse/ Lift-Arc Connections

    ![image 67](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile67.png)

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | |

    4 1

    2

    3

    5

    ! Turn off power before mak-

    ing connections.

  • 1 Electrode Weld Output Terminal
  • Connect TIG torch to electrode weld output terminal.

    Page 52

  • 2 Gas Out Connection
  • Connect torch gas hose to gas out fitting.

  • 3 Work Weld Output Terminal
  • Connect work lead to work weld output terminal.

  • 4 Remote 14 Receptacle
  • If desired, connect remote control to Remote 14 receptacle (see Section 4-13).

  • 5 Gas In Connection
  • Connect gas hose from gas supply to gas in fitting (see Section 4-19).

    Tools Needed:

    11/16 in. (21 mm for CE units)

    803 915-B

    ############ 4-21. Cooler Connections

    | | | |Cart and cooler are optional equipment.

    1 AC Duplex Receptacle

    | |---|---|---|---| |2 115 VAC Cord Provides 115 vac to power cooler.
    3 Electrode Weld Output Terminal (−Weld Output Terminal On Maxstar Models)

    Connect TIG torch to electrode weld output terminal.

    4 Gas Out Connection

    Connect TIG torch gas hose to gas out fitting.

    5 Work Weld Output Terminal (+Weld Output Terminal On Maxstar Models)

    Connect work lead to work weld output terminal.

    6 Water-Out (To Torch) Connection

    Connect torch water-in (blue) hose to welding power source water-out connection.

    7 Water-In (From Torch) Connection


    Connect torch water-out (red) hose to welding power source water-in connection.

    1

    |Application|GTAW Or Where HF* Is Used| |---|---| | | | |Coolant

    3-1/2 Gal|Low Conductivity Coolant No. 043 810**; Distilled Or Deionized Water OK Above 32 F (0 C)|

    *HF: High Frequency Current
    **Coolant 043 810, a 50/50 solution, protect to -37 F (-38C) and resist algae growth.


    3

    4
    5


    6

    7


    804 753-B

    2


    Tools Needed:

    11/16 in. (21 mm for CE units)

    NOTICE − Use of any coolant other than those listed in the table voids the warranty on any parts that come in contact with the coolant (pump, radiator, etc.).|2 115 VAC Cord Provides 115 vac to power cooler.
    3 Electrode Weld Output Terminal (−Weld Output Terminal On Maxstar Models)

    Connect TIG torch to electrode weld output terminal.

    4 Gas Out Connection

    Connect TIG torch gas hose to gas out fitting.

    5 Work Weld Output Terminal (+Weld Output Terminal On Maxstar Models)

    Connect work lead to work weld output terminal.

    6 Water-Out (To Torch) Connection

    Connect torch water-in (blue) hose to welding power source water-out connection.

    7 Water-In (From Torch) Connection


    Connect torch water-out (red) hose to welding power source water-in connection.

    1

    |Application|GTAW Or Where HF* Is Used| |---|---| | | | |Coolant

    3-1/2 Gal|Low Conductivity Coolant No. 043 810**; Distilled Or Deionized Water OK Above 32 F (0 C)|

    *HF: High Frequency Current
    **Coolant 043 810, a 50/50 solution, protect to -37 F (-38C) and resist algae growth.


    3

    4
    5


    6

    7


    804 753-B

    2


    Tools Needed:

    11/16 in. (21 mm for CE units)

    NOTICE − Use of any coolant other than those listed in the table voids the warranty on any parts that come in contact with the coolant (pump, radiator, etc.).|2 115 VAC Cord Provides 115 vac to power cooler.
    3 Electrode Weld Output Terminal (−Weld Output Terminal On Maxstar Models)

    Connect TIG torch to electrode weld output terminal.

    4 Gas Out Connection

    Connect TIG torch gas hose to gas out fitting.

    5 Work Weld Output Terminal (+Weld Output Terminal On Maxstar Models)

    Connect work lead to work weld output terminal.

    6 Water-Out (To Torch) Connection

    Connect torch water-in (blue) hose to welding power source water-out connection.

    7 Water-In (From Torch) Connection


    Connect torch water-out (red) hose to welding power source water-in connection.

    1

    |Application|GTAW Or Where HF* Is Used| |---|---| | | | |Coolant

    3-1/2 Gal|Low Conductivity Coolant No. 043 810**; Distilled Or Deionized Water OK Above 32 F (0 C)|

    Page 53



    *HF: High Frequency Current
    **Coolant 043 810, a 50/50 solution, protect to -37 F (-38C) and resist algae growth.


    3

    4
    5


    6

    7


    804 753-B

    2


    Tools Needed:

    11/16 in. (21 mm for CE units)

    NOTICE − Use of any coolant other than those listed in the table voids the warranty on any parts that come in contact with the coolant (pump, radiator, etc.).|2 115 VAC Cord Provides 115 vac to power cooler.
    3 Electrode Weld Output Terminal (−Weld Output Terminal On Maxstar Models)

    Connect TIG torch to electrode weld output terminal.

    4 Gas Out Connection

    Connect TIG torch gas hose to gas out fitting.

    5 Work Weld Output Terminal (+Weld Output Terminal On Maxstar Models)

    Connect work lead to work weld output terminal.

    6 Water-Out (To Torch) Connection

    Connect torch water-in (blue) hose to welding power source water-out connection.

    7 Water-In (From Torch) Connection


    Connect torch water-out (red) hose to welding power source water-in connection.

    1

    |Application|GTAW Or Where HF* Is Used| |---|---| | | | |Coolant

    3-1/2 Gal|Low Conductivity Coolant No. 043 810**; Distilled Or Deionized Water OK Above 32 F (0 C)|

    *HF: High Frequency Current
    **Coolant 043 810, a 50/50 solution, protect to -37 F (-38C) and resist algae growth.


    3

    4
    5


    6

    7


    804 753-B

    2


    Tools Needed:

    11/16 in. (21 mm for CE units)

    NOTICE − Use of any coolant other than those listed in the table voids the warranty on any parts that come in contact with the coolant (pump, radiator, etc.).|

    ############ 4-22. Dynasty Stick Connections

    3

    2

    1

    ! Turn off power before making

    connections.

    Connections shown are for Dynasty models.

  • 1 Work Weld Output Terminal
  • Connect work lead to work weld output terminal.

  • 2 Electrode Weld Output Terminal
  • Connect electrode holder to electrode weld output terminal.

  • 3 Remote 14 Receptacle
  • If desired, connect remote control to Remote 14 receptacle (see Section 4-13).

    803 916-C

    ############ 4-23. Maxstar Stick Connections

    2

    Page 54

    3

    1

    ! Turn off power before making

    connections.

    Connections shown are for Maxstar models.

  • 1 + Weld Output Terminal
  • Connect electrode lead to positive (+) weld output terminal.

  • 2 − Weld Output Terminal
  • Connect work lead to negative (−) weld output terminal.

  • 3 Remote 14 Receptacle
  • If desired, connect remote control to Remote 14 receptacle (see Section 4-13).

    803 916-C

    3

  • 12
  • 5-1. Controls
  • 13
  • ###### SECTION 5 − OPERATION

    2

    Page 55

    1

    11

    | | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---|---| | | | | | | |

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | |

    4 5

    867

    9 10

    Polarity And AC Waveshape Controls Are Available On Dynasty Models Only.

    14

    226 868-B / Ref. 803 901-A

    Rear Panel

    For all front panel switch pad controls: press switch pad to turn on light and enable normal function.

    Green on nameplate indicates a TIG function, Gray indicates a normal Stick function.

  • 1 Encoder Control
  • 2 Ammeter And Parameter Display
  • See Section 5-4.
  • 3 Voltmeter And Selected Parameter Display

    Page 56

  • See Section 5-5.
  • 4 Polarity Control (Dynasty Only)
  • See Section 5-6.
  • 5 Process Controls

  • See Section 5-7.
  • 6 Output Controls
  • See Section 5-9.
  • 7 Pulser Controls

  • See Section 5-10.
  • 8 Sequencer Controls

  • See Section 5-11.
  • 9 Gas/DIG Controls

  • See Section 5-12.
  • 10 AC Waveshape (Dynasty Only)
  • See Section 5-13.
  • 11 Amperage And Spot Time Control For Amperage Control see Section 5-3. For Spot Time Control see Section 6-6. 12 Memory

    Page 57

  • See Section 5-14.
  • 13 Memory Display Displays active memory.
  • 14 Power Switch Use switch to turn unit On/Off.
  • ############ 5-2. Encoder Control

    |1 Encoder Control

    Use control in conjunction with applicable front panel function switch pad to set values for that function.

    1

    | |---|

    ############ 5-3. Amperage Control

    |1 A (Amperage Control)
    2 Encoder Control
    3 Ammeter


    See Section 5-15 for Amperage control range.

    Press Amperage switch pad, and turn Encoder control to set weld amperage, or peak amperage when Pulser function is active (see Section 5-10).

    See Section 5-13 for AC functions.

    2

    3

    1

    | |---|

    ############ 5-4. Ammeter And Parameter Display

    |1 Ammeter

    Ammeter displays actual amperage while welding. It also displays adjustable parameters for all functions

    1

    | |---|

    ############ 5-5. Voltmeter And Selected Parameter Display

    |1 Volt Meter

    Displays output or open circuit voltage. Also displays word abbreviations for selected parameters.

    1

    | |---|

    ############ 5-6. Polarity Control (Dynasty Models Only)

    |1 Polarity Control Press switch pad until desired LED is illuminated.

    DC - Select DC for DC welding. Machines electrode output is DCEN for TIG, and DCEP for Stick.

    AC - Select AC for AC welding.

    1

    | |---|

    ############ 5-7. Process Control

    Page 58

    |1

    1 Process Control Press switch pad until desired process LED is illuminated:

    TIG HF Impulse - is a pulsed HF (see Section 5-8) arc starting method that can be used with either AC or DC TIG welding. Make connections according to Section 4-20.

    TIG Lift-Arc - is an arc starting method in which the electrode must come in contact with the workpiece (see Section 5-8). This method can be used with either AC or DC TIG welding. Make connections according to Section 4-20.

    Stick (SMAW) - This method can be used with either AC or DC Stick welding. Make connections according to Section 4-22.| |---|

    ############ 5-8. Lift-Arc And HF TIG Start Procedures

    |Lift-Arc Start

    When Lift-Arc button light is On, start arc as follows:

    1 TIG Electrode
    2 Workpiece


    Touch tungsten electrode to workpiece at weld start point, enable output and shielding gas with torch trigger, foot control, or hand control. Hold electrode to workpiece for 1-2 seconds, and slowly lift electrode. Arc is formed when electrode is lifted.

    Normal open-circuit voltage is not present before tungsten electrode touches workpiece; only a low sensing voltage is present between electrode and workpiece. The solid-state output contactor does not energize until after electrode is touching workpiece. This allows a properly prepared electrode (see Section 11-2) to touch workpiece without overheating, sticking, or getting contaminated.

    Application:

    Lift-Arc is used for the DCEN or AC GTAW process when HF Start method is not permitted, or to replace the scratch method.

    HF Start

    When HF Start button light is On, start arc as follows:

    High frequency turns on to start arc when output is enabled. High frequency turns off when arc is started, and turns on whenever arc is broken to help restart arc.

    Application:

    HF start is used for the DCEN GTAW, or the AC GTAW process when a non-contact arc starting method is required.

    1

    1 − 2 Seconds“Touch”

    Do NOT Strike Like A Match!

    2

    Lift-Arc Start Method

    | |---|

    ############ 5-9. Output Control

    |1

    1 Output Control Press switch pad until desired parameter LED is illuminated. RMT STD (Remote Standard)

    Application: Use Remote Trigger (Standard) with a foot pedal or finger amperage control (see Section 6-3A).

    When a foot or finger remote current control is connected, initial amps, initial slope, final slope, and final amps are controlled by the remote control.

    NOTE: If an On/Off type trigger is used, it must be a maintained switch. All Sequencer functions become active, and must be set by the operator.

    RMT 2T HOLD Application: Use Remote Trigger Hold (2T) for long extended welds.

    If a foot or finger current control is connected to the welding power source, only trigger input is functional (see Section 6-3B).

    This switch function can be reconfigured for 3T, 4T, 4T Momentary, or

    Mini Logic control See Sections 6-3C, D, E, or F)

    ON

    Output will energize two seconds after being selected.

    Application: Use Output On for Stick (SMAW) welding, or for Lift-Arc without the use of a remote control (see Section 6-3G).

    2 On LED Blue On LED is lit whenever Output is on.

    2| |---|

    ############ 5-10. Pulser Control

    |1

    3

    2

    | | | |---|---| |Percent (%) Peak Time Control Setting|Pulsed Output Waveforms| | | | |Peak 50%/Background 50% Balanced 50%

    |Peak Amp

    | |Bkg Amp|Bkg Amp| |---|---|---| | | | |

    PPS| |More Time At Peak Amperage

    (80%)| | |More Time At

    Background Amperage

    (20%)| |

    4


    1 Pulser Control

    Pulsing is available while using the TIG process. Controls can be adjusted while welding.

    Press switch pad to enable pulser. ON - When illuminated, this LED indicates the pulser is on. Press switch pad until desired parameter LED is illuminated. To turn Pulser off, press and release switch pad until the On LED turns off.

    2 Encoder Control (Set Value)
    3 Ammeter (Displays Value) See Section 5-15 for all Pulser parameter ranges.

    PPS - Pulse frequency or pulses per second, is the number of pulse cycles per second. Pulse frequency helps reduce heat input, part warpage, and helps weld bead cosmetics. The higher the PPS setting, the smoother the ripple effect, the narrower the weld bead, and the more cooling you get. By setting PPS on the lower end, the pulse is slower, and the weld bead wider. This slow pulsing helps agitate the weld puddle to help release gas trapped in the weldment, and help reduce porosity (very useful in aluminum welding). Some beginners use a slower pulse rate (2-4 pps) to help them with their timing on adding filler material. An experienced welder may have the PPS setting much higher, depending on their personal preferences, and on what they are trying to accomplish.

    PEAK t - (PEAK t) is the percentage of time in each cycle, spent at peak amperage (main amperage). Peak amperage is set with the Amperage control (see Section 5-3). If one pulse per second is being used, and peak time is set at 50%, one-half second is spent at peak amperage, and the other 50%, or one-half second, is spent at the background amperage. Increasing peak time increases time spent at peak amperage, which increases heat input into the part. A good starting point for peak time is about 50-60%. To find a good ratio, you will have to experiment a bit, but the idea is to decrease heat input into the part, and increase the cosmetics of the weld.

    BKGND A - (Background amps) is set as a percentage of the peak amps setting. If peak amps is set at 200, and background amps at 50%, your background amps is 100 amps when the machine pulses on the background side of the cycle. The lower background amperage helps reduce heat input. Increasing or decreasing background amps increases or decreases the overall average amperage, which helps determine how fluid your puddle is on the background side of the pulse cycle. Overall, you want your puddle to shrink to about one-half the size, but still remain fluid. To start with, set background amps at about 20-30% for stainless/carbon steel, or at about 35-50% for aluminum alloys.

    4 Pulsed Output Waveforms


    Example shows affect changing the Peak Time control has on the pulsed output waveform.

    Application:

    Pulsing refers to the alternating raising and lowering of the weld output at a specific rate. The raised portions of the weld output are controlled in width, height, and frequency, forming pulses of weld output. These pulses and the lower amperage level between them (called the background amperage) alternately heat and cool the molten weld puddle. The combined effect gives the operator better control of penetration, bead width, crowning, undercutting, and heat input. Controls can be adjusted while welding.

    Pulsing can also be used for filler material addition technique training.

    Function is enabled, when LED is lit| |---|

    ############ 5-11. Sequencer Controls

    |2

    3

    1

    5

    1 Sequencer Control

    Sequencing is available while using the TIG process, but is disabled if a remote foot or finger current control is connected to the Remote receptacle while in the RMT STD mode.

    Press switch pad until desired parameter LED is illuminated.

    2 Encoder Control (Set Value)

    Turn control to set values for the sequencer parameters.

    3 Ammeter (Displays Value)

    See Section 5-15 for all Sequencer parameter ranges.

    4 Voltmeter

    Displays word abbreviations of selected parameters.

    INITIAL A (Initial Amperage) [INTL] - Use control to select a starting amperage that is different from the weld amperage.

    Application:

    Initial Amperage can be used to assist in preheating cold material prior to depositing filler material, or to ensure a soft start.

    INITIAL t (Initial Time) [INTL] (Available with Automation option Only) - Press control again and turn Encoder to set amount of time needed at the beginning of the weld.

    INITIAL SLOPE t (Initial Slope Time) [ISLP] Use control to set amount of time that it takes to slope from initial amperage to weld amperage. To disable, set to 0.

    5 Amperage Switch Pad


    Weld Time (Available with Automation option Only) - Press Amperage switch pad twice. Set desired weld time.

    Spot Time - Press amperage switch twice. Set desired spot time.

    FINAL SLOPE t (Final Slope Time) [FSLP] - Use control to set amount of time it takes to slope from weld amperage to final amperage. To disable, set to 0.

    Application:

    Final Slope should be used while welding materials that are crack sensitive, and/or to eliminate the crater at the end of the weld.

    FINAL A (Final Amperage) [FNL] Used to set amperage to which weld amperage slopes to.

    FINAL t (Final Time) [FNL] (Available with Automation option Only)- Press control again and turn Encoder to set Final Amperage time.

    4

    | |---|

    Page 59

    ############ 5-12. Gas/DIG Controls (Preflow/Post Flow/DIG/Purge)

    |1

    2

    3

    1 Gas/DIG Controls

    Press switch pad until desired function LED is illuminated.

    2 Encoder Control (Set Value)
    3 Ammeter (Displays Value)

    See Section 5-15 for all Adjust parameter ranges.

    4 Voltmeter


    Displays word abbreviations of selected parameters.

    PREFLOW[PRE] -If the TIG HF process is active (see Section 5-7) and Preflow is shown on the control panel, use control to set length of time gas flows before arc initiation.

    Application: Preflow is used to purge the weld area and aids in arc starts.

    POST FLOW [POST]- If the TIG process is active (see Section 5-7), use control to set length of time gas flows after welding stops.

    AUTO POST FLOW - Creates a post flow time scaled at 1 second per 10 amps of the peak weld amperage for a given weld cycle. Auto post flow is limited to a 8 second minimum, or to the maximum preset post flow time.

    Application:

    Postflow is required to cool tungsten and weld, and to prevent contamination of tungsten and weld. Increase postflow time if tungsten or weld are dark in appearance.

    DIG - If Stick process is active (see Section 5-7), use control to set amount of DIG. When set at 0, short-circuit amperage at low arc voltage is the same as normal welding amperage.

    When setting is increased, short-circuit amperage at low arc voltage increases.

    Application:

    Control helps arc starting or making vertical or overhead welds by increasing amperage at low arc voltage, and reduces electrode sticking while welding.

    PURGE [PURG] - To activate the gas valve and start the purge function, push and hold the Gas/DIG switch pad for the desired amount of time. To set from 1 to 50 seconds of purge time, hold the Gas/ DIG switch pad while turning the encoder control. Default is 0.

    While Purge is active, [PURG] is shown in the left display, and purge time is shown in the right display.

    Pressing any switch pad will end the purge display, but gas will continue to flow until the preset time has timed out.

    Application: Purge is used to clear the gas lines.

    4

    | |---|

    ############ 5-13. AC Waveshape (Dynasty Models Only)

    |1

    2

    3

    1 AC Waveshape Control

    Press switch pad until desired function LED is illuminated.

    2 Encoder Control (Set Value)
    3 Ammeter (Displays Value)

    See Section 5-15 for all AC Waveshape parameter ranges.

    EN Amperage [EN] - Use with AC TIG only to select electrode negative amperage value.

    EP Amperage [EP] - Use with AC TIG only to select electrode positive amperage value. Note: See Section 6-1 to set same Amplitude control [ENEP].

    EN Amperage and EP Amperage allow the operator the ability to control the amount of amperage in the negative and positive half cycles independently. A 1.5 to 1 ratio of EN to EP is a good starting point. This provides cleaning action, but directs more energy into the workpiece and provides faster travel speeds and deeper penetration.

    4 Amperage Control

    Average Amperage Control: Setting EN Amperage, EP Amperage, Balance, and Frequency values creates an average amperage. The operator can change the average amperage value while maintaining the same EN amperage to EP amperage ratio at the existing balance and frequency. To change the average amperage value, press the Amperage switch pad and turn the Encoder control. The changing average value is displayed on the ammeter. Example: If EN Amperage is 300, EP Amperage is 150, Balance is 60%, and Frequency is 120, the average amperage is 240 amps. If you press the Amperage switch pad and turn the Encoder control until 480 amps is displayed, the EN amperage is now 600 and EP amperage is now 300. The balance remains 60%, and the frequency is still 120, and the 2 to 1 EN amperage to EP amperage is maintained.

    Balance[BAL] - AC Balance control is enabled only in AC TIG to set percentage of time polarity is electrode negative. Set control at about 75%, and fine tune from there.

    5 Voltmeter


    Displays word abbreviations of selected parameters.

    Application:

    When welding on oxide forming materials such as aluminum or magnesium, excess cleaning is not necessary. To produce a good weld, only 0.10 in (2.5mm) of etched zone along the weld toes is required.

    Use AC Balance to control the etch zone width. Joint configuration, set-up, process variables, and oxide thickness may affect setting.

    AC Frequency [FREQ] - Use control to set AC frequency (cycles per second).

    Application:

    AC Frequency controls arc width and directional control. As AC frequency decreases, the arc becomes wider and less focused, limiting directional control. As AC frequency increases, the arc becomes narrower and more focused, increasing directional control. Travel speed can increase as AC frequency increases.

    5

    f

    4

    | |---|

    ############ 5-14. Memory (Program Storage Locations 1-9)

    |1 Memory (Program Storage 1-9) Switch Pad
    2 Polarity Switch Pad (Dynasty Only)
    3 Process Switch Pad


    To create, change, or recall a welding parameters program, proceed as follows:

    First, press Memory switch pad until the desired program storage location (1-9) is displayed.

    Second, press Polarity switch pad until the desired polarity, AC or DC, LED is illuminated

    Third, press Process switch pad until desired process, TIG HF Impulse, TIG Lift Arc, or Stick, LED is illuminated.

    The program at the chosen location, for the desired polarity and process, is now the active program.

    Fourth, change or set all desired parameters (see Section 5-15 for parameters).

    |Memory Locations 1−9| |---|

    |AC| |---|

    |DC| |---|

    |TIG (HF or Lift)| |---|

    |TIG (HF or Lift)| |---|

    |Stick| |---|

    |Stick| |---|

    For Dynasty Models, each memory location (1 thru 9) can store parameters for both polarities (AC and DC), and each polarity can store parameters for both process (TIG and Stick) for a total of 36 programs.

    And

    And

    And

    1

    2


    3

    2nd 3rd

    1st

    Polarity And AC Waveshape Controls Are Available On Dynasty Models Only.

    Memory Locations 1−9

    DC

    |TIG (HF or Lift)| |---|

    |Stick| |---|

    For Maxstar Models, each memory location (1 thru 9) can store parameters for both process (TIG and Stick) for a total of 18 programs.

    And

    | |---|

    ############ 5-15. Factory Parameter Defaults And Range And Resolution For 350 Models

    |Parameter|Default|Range And Resolution|

    Page 60

    |---|---|---| |MEMORY|1|1−9| |(DYNASTY ONLY) POLARITY|AC|AC / DC| |PROCESS|TIG HF Impulse|TIG HF Impulse / TIG Lift / Stick| |OUTPUT **RMT 2T|RMT STD 2T|RMT STD / RMT 2T / ON

    RMT 2T can be reconfigured for: 2T / 3T / 4T / Mini Logic / 4T Momentary (see Section 6-3)| |A MAIN / PEAK (DYNASTY ONLY) AC TIG (DYNASTY ONLY) AC STICK

    DC TIG DC STICK|150 A 110 A 150 A 110 A|5 − 350 Amps 5 − 350 Amps 5 − 350 Amps 5 − 350 Amps| |*Spot
    *Spot Time
    **Weld Time
    |OFF 0 T 0T|ON/OFF 0 − 999 Seconds 0 − 999 Seconds| |PULSER PPS

    PEAK t BKGND A|Off 100 Hz

    40% 25%|ON / OFF DC: 0.1 - 5000 PPS AC: 0.1 − 500 PPS

    5 − 95 Percent 5 − 95 Percent| |SEQUENCER INITIAL A Initial Time INITIAL SLOPE t FINAL SLOPE t FINAL A Final Time|20 A 0 T 0 T 0 T 5 A 0 T|5 − 350 Amps 0.0 − 25.0 Seconds 0.0 − 50.0 Seconds 0.0 − 50.0 Seconds 5 − 350 Amps 0.0 − 25.0 Seconds| |ADJUST PREFLOW POST FLOW DIG|0.2 T Auto 30%|0.0 − 25.0 Seconds Auto 1 − 50 Seconds 0 − 100 Percent| |(DYNASTY ONLY) AC WAVESHAPE

    *Waveform EN Amps EP Amps BALANCE FREQUENCY EN/EP|Soft Square 150A 150A 75% 120 Hz Independent|Soft Square, Advanced Square, Sine, Triangle 5 - 350 Amps 5 - 350 Amps 30 − 99 Percent 20 − 400 Hertz Same/Independent|

    Factory Parameter Defaults And Range And Resolution For 350 Models (Continued)

    |*TIG Start parameters for each program (1-9) DC:

    *Tungsten
    *Polarity (DYNASTY ONLY)
    *Amperage
    *Time
    *Start Slope Time
    *Preset Amperage Minimum AC: (DYNASTY ONLY)

    *Tungsten
    *Polarity


    *Amperage
    *Time
    *Start Slope Time
    *Preset Amperage Minimum
    |.094 EN 60 A 1 ms 40 ms 5 A

    .094 EP 130 A 20 ms 20 ms 5 A|GEN, .020, .040, .062, .094, .125, .156, .187 EP / EN 1 − 200 Amps 1 − 200 Milliseconds 0 − 250 Milliseconds 5 − 25 Amps

    GEN, .020, .040, .062, .094, .125, .156, .187 EP / EN 5 − 200 Amps 1 − 200 Milliseconds 0 − 250 Milliseconds 5 − 25 Amps| |---|---|---| |* Parameter adjusted using an Advanced Function configuration only (See Section 6).
    Parameter used with the automation option only.


    * Parameter adjust in GEN setting only (see Section 6-2).|* Parameter adjusted using an Advanced Function configuration only (See Section 6).
    Parameter used with the automation option only.


    * Parameter adjust in GEN setting only (see Section 6-2).|* Parameter adjusted using an Advanced Function configuration only (See Section 6).
    Parameter used with the automation option only.


    * Parameter adjust in GEN setting only (see Section 6-2).|

  • 5-16. Factory Parameter Defaults And Range And Resolution For 700 Models
  • |Parameter|Default|Range And Resolution| |---|---|---| |MEMORY|1|1−9| |(DYNASTY ONLY) POLARITY|AC|AC / DC| |PROCESS|TIG HF Impulse|TIG HF Impulse / TIG Lift / Stick| |OUTPUT **RMT 2T|RMT STD 2T|RMT STD / RMT 2T / ON

    RMT 2T can be reconfigured for: 2T / 3T / 4T / Mini Logic / 4T Momentary / Spot (see Section 6-3)| |A MAIN / PEAK (DYNASTY ONLY) AC TIG (DYNASTY ONLY) AC STICK

    DC TIG DC STICK|500 A 110 A 500 A 110 A|5 − 700 Amps 5 − 700 Amps 5 − 700 Amps 5 − 700 Amps| |*Spot Spot Time **Weld Time|Off 0 T 0T|On/Off 0.0 − 999 Seconds 0.0 − 999 Seconds| |PULSER PPS

    PEAK t BKGND A|Off 100 Hz

    40% 25%|ON / OFF DC: 0.1 − 5000 PPS AC: 0.1 − 500 PPS

    5 − 95 Percent 5 − 95 Percent| |SEQUENCER INITIAL A Initial Time INITIAL SLOPE t FINAL SLOPE t FINAL A Final Time|20 A 0 T 0 T 0 T 5 A 0 T|5 − 700 Amps 0.0 − 25.0 Seconds 0.0 − 50.0 Seconds 0.0 − 50.0 Seconds 5 − 700 Amps 0.0 − 25.0 Seconds|

    ############ Factory Parameter Defaults And Range And Resolution For 700 Models (Continued)

    |ADJUST PREFLOW POST FLOW DIG|0.2 T Auto 30%|0.0 − 25.0 Seconds Auto 1 − 50.0 Seconds @ 1 Second Resolution 0 − 100 Percent| |---|---|---|

    Page 61

    |(DYNASTY ONLY) AC WAVESHAPE

    *Waveform EN Amps EP Amps BALANCE FREQUENCY *EN/EP|Soft Square 500A 500A 75% 120 Hz Independent|Soft Square, Advanced Square, Sine, Triangle 5 - 700 Amps 5 - 700 Amps 30 − 99 Percent 20 − 400 Hertz Same/Independent| |*TIG Start parameters for each program (1-9) DC:

    *Tungsten
    *Polarity (DYNASTY ONLY)
    *Amperage
    *Time
    Start Slope Time
    *Preset Amperage Minimum AC: (DYNASTY ONLY)

    *Tungsten
    *Polarity


    *Amperage
    *Time
    *Start Slope Time
    *Preset Amperage Minimum
    |.094 EN 60 A 1 ms 40 ms 5 A

    .094 EP 130 A 20 ms 20 ms 5 ms|GEN, .020, .040, .062, .094, .125, .156, .187, .250 EP / EN 1 − 200 Amps 1 − 200 Milliseconds 0 − 250 Milliseconds 5 − 25 Amps

    GEN, .020, .040, .062, .094, .125, .156, .187, .250 EP / EN 5 − 200 Amps 1 − 200 Milliseconds 0 − 250 Milliseconds 5 − 25 Amps| |* Parameter adjusted using an Advanced Function configuration only (See Section 6).
    Parameter used with the automation option only


    * Parameter adjust in GEN setting only (see Section 6-2).|* Parameter adjusted using an Advanced Function configuration only (See Section 6).
    Parameter used with the automation option only


    * Parameter adjust in GEN setting only (see Section 6-2).|* Parameter adjusted using an Advanced Function configuration only (See Section 6).
    Parameter used with the automation option only


    * Parameter adjust in GEN setting only (see Section 6-2).|

    ############ 5-17. Resetting Unit To Factory Default Settings

    |1 Process Switch Pad
    2 Output Switch Pad
    3 Gas/DIG Switch Pad
    4 Power Switch


    To reset the active memory, polarity, and process to original factory settings, lockout feature must be off (see Section 6-9). Turn power on and then press and hold the Process, Output, and Gas/DIG switch pads before the machine name clears the meters.

    1 2 3

    Rear Panel

    4

    V

    | |---|

    ############ 5-18. Software And Revision Viewing

    |1 Power Switch
    2 Process Switch Pad


    To access software numbers, turn power on and then press and hold Process switch pad until machine name clears. First [SOFT][NUM] will appear for two seconds followed by the software number for five seconds.

    2 Rear Panel

    1

    V

    | |---|

    ############ 5-19. Arc Timer/Counter Display

    |f

    1 Output And Amperage Controls
    2 Power Switch To display the arc timer/counter, turn power switch on, press and hold the Amperage Control and Output switch pads until the machine name clears the meters.


    3 Arc Timer Display The arc time will be displayed for 5 seconds as [0-9999][Hours] then [0-59][Mins].

    4 Arc Counter

    After 5 seconds, the arc count will be displayed for the next 5 seconds as

    [0cy] to [9999][99cy].

    And

    1

    1234 Hour

    3/4

    Rear Panel

    2

    V

    1| |---|

    ###### SECTION 6 − ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

  • 6-1. Accessing Advanced Functions
  • ||f| | | |---|---|---| | | | |

    1 Amperage Switch Pad
    2 Gas/Dig
    3 Encoder Control


    To access the advanced functions, press and hold the Amperage (A) switch pad and then press the Gas/Dig switch pad. To scroll through the advanced functions, press and release the Gas/Dig switch pad. Use the Encoder control to change parameters for each function.

    Advanced Functions:

     Programmable TIG Start Parameters (see Section 6-2) − Allows you to set tungsten size, amps, time, polarity, and preset amperage minimum to customize arc starts for different tungstens.
     Output Remote Hold And Trigger Functions (see Section 6-3) − For reconfiguring RMT 2T Hold for 3T, 4T Momentary,


    or Mini Logic
     AC Waveshape Selection with Dynasty models only (see Section 6-4) − Allows you to set a soft, sine, triangle, or advanced AC waveshape for each memory location if desired.
     Independent Amplitude Selection with Dynasty models only (see Section 6-5) − Allows you to set the amplitude of the AC waveshape equal for both the positive and negative half of the weld cycle, or have independent settings.
     Spot Enable (see Section 6-6) − Allows you to turn the spot function on and be available for all programs.
     Stick OCV Selection (see Section 6-7) − Allows you to select either low or normal OCV (open circuit voltage).


     Stick Stuck Check Selection (See Section 6-8) − With Stick Stuck Check on and the welding electrode (rod) stuck, output is turned off in an attempt to save the rod for reuse.
     Lockout Functions (see Section 6-9) − Allows you to turn the lockout function on and off and adjust the lockout levels.
     Meter Displays (see Section 6-10) − Allows you to set meters to display weld voltage and amperage, or blank meters while pulse welding. Also allows you to select amperage preset of peak or average amperage for DC TIG pulse.
     DC Meter Calibration (See Section 6-11) − Allows voltage/amperage calibration of DC meter.


    To exit advanced functions, press and hold the Amperage (A) switch pad and then press the Gas/Dig switch pad.

    1

    2

    3

    | |---|

    ############ 6-2. Programmable TIG Start Parameters

    Each memory and polarity selection has their own programmable parameters.

    Page 62

    ############ A. Tungsten Selection

    3

    |.094| |---|

    |TUNG| |---|

    2

    1

    Current (A)

    Start Amperage

    Start Time

    Start Slope Time

    Preset Amperage Minimum

  • 1 Amperage Switch Pad
  • 2 Encoder Control
  • 3 Amps Meter Preset TIG Start Parameters
  • Use Encoder control to select a tungsten size from the following: .020, .040, .062

    (1/16 in.), .094 (3/32 in.), or .125 (1/8 in.), .156 (5/32 in.), .187 (3/16 in.), [.250 (1/4 in.) 700 Models only], (.094 is the default). When one of the listed tungsten sizes is selected, the following TIG starting parameters are preset: Amperage, Start Time, Start Slope Time, and Preset Amperage Minim-

    um. There are a separate set of parameters for AC and DC (to select polarity see Section C). If it is necessary or desired to manually set the TIG starting parameters, turn the encoder until GEN is displayed on the amps meter (see Section B).

    ############ B. Selecting GEN

    Page 63

    |1 Encoder Control
    2 Amps Meter
    3 Amperage Switch Pad


    If [GEn] is selected and displayed on the amps meter, the TIG starting parameters for a .094 tungsten are the default, and for AC polarity they are: Start Polarity = EP, Start Amperage = 120 A, Start Time = 20 ms, Start Slope Time = 10 ms, Preset Minimum Amps = 5 A. For DC polarity they are: Start Polarity = EN, Start Amperage = 60 A, Start Time = 1 ms, Start Slope Time = 40 ms, Preset Minimum Amps = 5 A. These parameters can be manually changed by pressing the Amperage switch pad to step through each adjustable parameter. To change parameters, see Sections C, D, E, F, and G.

    1

    2

    3

    Current (A)

    Start Time

    Start Slope Time

    Preset Amperage Minimum

    Start Amperage

    20 ms

    120 Amps

    10 ms

    5 Amps

    GEN Default AC TIG Start Parameter Relationships

    Current (A)

    Start Time

    Start Slope Time

    Preset Amperage Minimum

    Start Amperage

    1 ms

    60 Amps

    40 ms

    5 Amps

    GEN Default DC TIG Start Parameter Relationships

    TUNG GEN| |---|

    ############ C. Changing Programmable TIG Start Polarity (Dynasty Models Only)

    |2

    |POL| |---|

    3

    1 Amperage Switch Pad
    2 Encoder Control
    3 Amps Meter


    To adjust TIG Start Polarity proceed as follows:

    Press Amperage switch pad. Switch pad LED turns on, and meter % LED turns on. The current Start Polarity, (SEL] [E−] or

    [SEL][EP] is displayed on meters, and can be adjusted (see Section 5-15) by turning the Encoder control.

    To change Start Amperage, proceed to Section D.

    1

    Current (A)

    Start Polarity

    |En| |---| | |---|

    ############ D. Changing Programmable TIG Start Amperage

    |1 Amperage Switch Pad
    2 Encoder Control
    3 Amps Meter


    To adjust TIG Start Amperage proceed as follows:

    Press Amperage switch pad. Switch pad LED turns on, and meter A LED turns on. The current Start Amperage is displayed on

    the amps meter, and can be adjusted (see Section 5-15) by turning the Encoder control.

    To change Start Time, proceed to Section E.

    1

    2

    STRT

    |20A| |---|

    3

    Current (A)

    Start Amperage

    | |---|

  • E. Changing Programmable Start Time
  • F. Changing Start Slope Time
  • |1 Amperage Switch Pad
    2 Encoder Control
    3 Amps Meter To adjust Programmable Start Time pro-


    ceed as follows:

    Press Amperage switch pad, and meter S LED turns on. The current Start Time is displayed in milliseconds on the amps meter,

    and can be adjusted by turning the Encoder control (see Section 5-15).

    To change Start Slope Time, proceed to Section F.

    3

    2

    |TIME| |---|

    |10m| |---|

    1

    Current (A)

    Start Time| |---|

    |1 Amperage Switch Pad
    2 Encoder Control
    3 Amps Meter


    To adjust Start Slope Time proceed as follows:

    Press Amperage switch pad. Switch pad LED turns on, and meter S LED turns on. The Start Slope Time is displayed in milli-

    seconds on the amps meter, and can be adjusted (see Section 5-15) by turning the Encoder control.

    To change Preset Amperage Minimum, proceed to Section G.

    1

    2

    SSLP

    |20m| |---|

    3

    Current (A)

    Start Slope Time

    | |---|

    Page 64

    ############ G. Changing Preset Amperage Minimum

    |1 Amperage Switch Pad
    2 Encoder Control
    3 Amps Meter


    To adjust Preset Amperage Minimum proceed as follows:

    Press Amperage switch pad. Switch pad LED turns on, and meter A LED turns on. The Preset Minimum Amperage is displayed on the amps meter, and can be adjusted (see Section 5-15) by turning the Encoder control. The preset amperage minimum can be independently set for AC

    and DC.

    Whatever amperage is selected as the preset amperage minimum, is the minimum amperage that the machine will provide in either AC or DC.

    1

    2

    |PMIN| |---|

    |5A| |---|

    3

    Current (A)

    Preset Amperage Minimum

    | |---|

    ############ 6-3. Output Control And Trigger Functions

  • A. Remote (Standard) Torch Trigger Operation
  • |Current (A)

    Preflow

    Initial Amps

    Initial Slope Final Slope

    Postflow

    Main Amps

    Final Amps

    R RP/H Maintained Switch Foot Or Finger Remote Control

    P/H = Push trigger and hold R = Release trigger.

    When a foot or finger remote current control is connected to the welding power source, initial amps, initial slope, final slope and final amps are controlled by the remote control.| |---|

  • B. Remote 2T Torch Trigger Operation
  • |Current (A)

    Preflow

    Initial Amps

    Initial Slope Final Slope

    Postflow

    P/R

    Main Amps

    Final Amps

    P/R P/R = Push trigger and release. If torch trigger is held more than 3 seconds, operation reverts to RMT STD (Remote Standard) mode.

    | |---|

    ############ C. 3T Specific Trigger Method

    1

    ##### RMT 3T

    2

    =3T

    Current (A)

    Page 65

    Remote Trigger Operation

  • *
  • *
  • *
  • A B CDE Preflow Initial Amps/Initial Slope Main Amps Final Slope /Final Amps Postflow
  • Arc can be extinguished at any time by pressing and releasing both initial and final switches, or by lifting the torch and breaking the arc.
  • 1 3T (Specific Trigger Operation) Sequencer is required to reconfigure for 3T.
  • 3T requires a specific type of remote control with two independent momentarycontact switches. One will be designated initial switch, and it must be connected between Remote 14 receptacle pins A and B. The second will be designated as the final switch, and it must be connected between Remote 14 receptacle pins D and E.

  • 2 Encoder Control To select 3T, turn Encoder control. Definitions:
  • Initial slope rate is the rate of amperage change determined by the initial amperage, initial slope time, and main amperage.

    Final slope rate is the rate of amperage change determined by the main amperage, final slope time, and final amperage.

    ###################### Operation:

  • A. Press and release initial switch within 3/4 second to start shielding gas flow. To stop the preflow sequence before preflow time elapses (25 seconds), press and release final switch. The preflow timer will reset and the weld sequence can be started again.
  • If an initial switch closure is not made again before preflow time ends, gas flow stops, the timer resets, and an initial switch press and release is necessary to start the weld sequence again.

  • B. Press initial switch to start arc at initial amps. Holding switch will change amperage at initial slope rate (release switch to weld at desired amperage level).
  • Page 66

    C. When main amperage level is reached,

    initial switch can be released.

  • D. Press and hold the final switch to decrease amperage at final slope rate (release switch to weld at desired amperage level).
  • E. When final amperage has been reached, the arc extinguishes and shielding gas flows for the time set on the Postflow control.
  • ###################### Application:

    With the use of two remote switches instead of potentiometers, 3T gives the operator the ability to infinitely increase, decrease, or pause and hold amperage within the range determined by the initial, main, and final amperages.

    ############### D. 4T Specific Trigger Method

    |1 4T (Specific Trigger Operation)
    2 Encoder Control To select 4T, turn Encoder control. Torch trigger operation is as shown.


    4T allows the operator to toggle between weld current and final current.

    When a remote switch is connected to the welding power source, use the remote switch to control the weld cycle. Amperage is controlled by the welding power source.

    Application:

    Use 4T trigger method when the functions of a remote current control are desired, but only a remote on/off control is available.

    =

    |RMT| |---|

    |4T| |---|

    4T

    1

    Current (A)

    Preflow

    Initial Amps

    Initial Slope

    Final Slope

    Postflow

    P/H R P/H RP/R

    Main Amps

    Final Amps

    Torch Trigger Operation

    P/R

    P/H = Push and hold trigger; R = Release trigger; P/R = Push trigger and release in less than 3/4 seconds

    2| |---|

    ############### E. Mini Logic Operation

    |=

    |RMT| |---|

    |4TL| |---|

    Mini Logic

    1 1 Mini Logic Meter Display 2 Encoder Control To select Mini Logic, turn Encoder control. Torch trigger operation is as shown.

    Mini logic allows the operator to toggle between initial slope or main amps and initial amps. Final Amperage is not available. Final slope will always slope to minimum amperage and end the cycle.

    When a remote switch is connected to the welding power source, use the remote switch to control the weld cycle. Amperage is controlled by the welding power source.

    Application:This ability to change current levels without either initial slope or final slope, gives the operator the opportunity to adjust filler metal without breaking the arc.

    Preflow

    Initial Amps

    Initial Slope Final Slope

    Postflow

    Main Amps

    Torch Trigger Operation

    * *

    *

    *

    P/H R P/R P/R P/R P/R P/R P/H P/H = Push and hold trigger; R = Release trigger; P/R = Push trigger and release in less than 3/4 seconds

    * = Arc can be extinguished at final slope rate at any time by pushing and holding trigger

    2| |---|

    ############### F. 4T Momentary Operation

    |1 4T Momentary Meter Display
    2 Encoder Control To select 4T Momentary, turn Encoder control. 4T Momentary torch trigger operation is as shown.


    When a remote switch is connected to the welding power source, use the remote switch to control the weld cycle. Amperage is controlled by the welding power source.

    Application:

    Use 4T Momentary trigger method when the functions of a remote current control are desired, but only a remote on/off control is available.

    =

    |4TE| |---|

    RMT 4T Momentary Main

    Current (A)

    Preflow

    Initial Amps

    Initial Slope Final Slope

    Postflow

    Main Amps

    Final Amps

    1

    For first torch trigger push & release, if trigger is held more than 3 seconds, trigger cycle ends.

    P/R P/R P/R P/R P/R = Push and release trigger; * = Push and releasing during final slope will break the arc and go to postflow

    P/R

    *

    2| |---|

    Page 67

    ############### G. On Trigger Operation

    |Voltage (V)

    Current (A)

    Current (A)

    Touch Stick

    Lift Stick

    Touch Current

    Initial Amperage Initial Slope

    Main Amperage

    Touch Tungsten

    Lift Tungsten Slightly

    Lift Tungsten

    Electrode Electrode

    ON

    2 Sec

    Stick

    Lift

    *Final Slope

    *Final Amperage

    *Becomes active with Spot Time enabled.

    | |---|

    ############ 6-4. AC Waveshape Selection (Dynasty Models Only)

    |1 Memory Switch Pad

    Each memory location can select any of four wave shapes.

    2 Encoder


    Use the Encoder, at any of the nine memory locations, to select between advanced squarewave [ADVS], soft squarewave [SOFT] (default), sine wave [Sine], or

    triangle wave [TRI].

    During normal operation, when EN or EP Amperage is selected, the left parameter screen will display the active waveshape [ADVS],, [Soft], [Sine], or [TRI] and the independent amplitude selection (see Section 6-5) as a reminder.

    Application: Use advance squarewave when a more focused arc is required for better directional control. Use soft squarewave when a softer arc with a more fluid puddle is desired. Use sine wave to simulate a conventional power source. Use triangular waveshape when the effects of peak amperage with reduced overall heat input is required to help control distortion on thin materials.

    2

    1

    AC

    = Advanced Squarewave = Soft Squarewave

    = Sine wave = Triangular wave

    Soft1| |---|

    ############ 6-5. Independent Amplitude Selection

    |1 Encoder Control
    2 Ammeter Parameter Selection


    To change between same [Same] and independent [INDP] amplitude adjustment, turn encoder control.

    Application: Use same if it is desired to have the same amperage set for both the electrode negative (EN) and electrode positive (EP) halves of the cycle. Use independent if you wish to set a different amperage for each half of the weld cycle for more control of the cleaning action and longer tungsten life (see Section 5-13).

    ENEP Same

    1

    2| |---|

    ############ 6-6. Spot Enable

    |1 Encoder
    2 Ammeter Parameter Selection
    3 Amperage Switch Pad


    Turn Encoder control to turn Spot on and off. Once on, exit set-up and press Amperage control switch pad twice and turn Encoder control to set spot time. The spot time default is zero for each program. Spot Enable works in RMT STD and RMT 2T Hold only. When a foot control is connected, amperage is controlled at the machine, not by a remote control.

    Application:Used for tacking and thin sheet joining.

    Spot Off

    1

    2

    3| |---|

    ############ 6-7. Stick Open-Circuit Voltage (OCV) Selection

    |1 Encoder Control
    2 Meter Display


    Turn Encoder to change between low OCV and normal OCV. Active selection is dis-

    played on the meters.

    When Stick low OCV is selected, open-circuit voltage is between 9 and 14 volts. When Stick normal OCV is selected, opencircuit voltage is approximately 72 volts.

    Application: For most Stick applications use low open-circuit voltage. Use normal open-circuit voltage for hard to start Stick electrodes, or if required for your particular application.

    OCV

    1

    LOW

    2

    | |---|

    ############ 6-8. Stick Stuck Check Selection

    |1 Encoder Control
    2 Ammeter Parameters Select Display


    Turn Encoder to change between Stick Stuck Check [ON and [OFF] meter display.

    When Stick Stuck Check is on and the welding electrode (rod) is stuck, output is turned off.

    Application: For most Stick applications, use Stick Stuck Check off. With Stick Stuck Check on and the welding electrode (rod) stuck, output is turned off in an attempt to save the rod for reuse. This allows the operator time to un-stick the rod, or disconnect the rod holder from the rod without arc occurring. Turn Stick Stuck Check on

    when this function is desired.

    Some applications may require Stick Stuck Check to be turned off. For example: Large stick electrodes operating at high amperages would require Stick Stuck Check to be turned off.

    ONSTUC

    12

    | |---|

    ############ 6-9. Lockout Functions

    Page 68

  • A. Accessing Lockout Capability
  • |2

    |OFF| |---|

    |Code| |---|

    1

    OFFLock

    See Section 5-1 for explanation of controls referred to in all of Section 6-9.

    There are four (1−4) different lockout levels. Each successive level allows the operator more flexibility.

    Before activating lockout levels, be sure that all procedures and parameters are established. Parameter adjustment is limited while lockout levels are active.

    To turn On the lockout feature, proceed as follows:

    1 Encoder Control
    2 Amperage (A) Switch Pad


    Press Amperage (A) switch pad to toggle between the lock and code displays. Toggle switch pad until code is displayed.

    Turn Encoder control to select a lockout code number. The code number will appear on the amp meter. Select any number from [1]

    thru [999]. IMPORTANT: remember this code number, as you will need it to turn the lockout feature off.

    Toggle Amperage (A) switch pad until lock is displayed. You may now select a lockout level.

    There are four lockout levels available. Turn Encoder control to select a lockout level (see Sections 6-9B for lockout level descriptions).

    Once the desired three digits have been entered and a lockout level selected, exit advanced functions mode (see Section 6-1).

    To turn Off the lockout feature, proceed as follows:

    Use Encoder control to enter the same code number that was used to turn on the lockout feature.

    Press the Amperage (A) switch pad. The amperage (right) meter display will change to [OFF]. The lockout feature is now off.

    Toggle

    Select Code Number

    Select Lockout Level

    1 to 999

    1, 2, 3, or 4

    Toggle| |---|

    ############### B. Lockout Levels

    Levels 1, 2, And 3

    L2

    L2 L2 L1 L3

    L3

    Use Encoder Control To Adjust Amperage 10% Of Preset Value.

    | | | | | |---|---|---|---| | | | | |

    Indicates which functions are available for the corresponding lockout level.

    Level 4

    AJ

  • B
  • K I

    Page 69

  • C L NH
  • D M G E F
  • Before activating lockout levels, be sure that all procedures and parameters are established. Parameter adjustment is limited while lockout levels are active.

    ###################### Level 1

    Remote amperage control is not available in level 1.

    ###################### TIG Output Selection

    If either the TIG HF Impulse or TIG Lift Arc process (see Section 5-7) was active when lockout level 1 was activated, the operator can choose between RMT STD (Remote Standard) or RMT 2T HOLD (Remote 2T Hold) (see Section 5-9). The On function is also available if TIG Lift Arc was active.

    ###################### Stick Output Selection

    If the Stick process was active when lockout level 1 was activated, the operator can choose between RMT STD or On.

    When parameter change or selection is lim-

  • ited by lock level 1, [LOCK][LEV1] is displayed as a reminder.
  • Level 2 Remote amperage control is not avail-
  • able in level 2.
  • Includes all the functions of level 1 plus Memory, Polarity and Process Selection (see Sections 5-6 and 5-7).

    When parameter change or selection is limited by lock level 2, [LOCK][LEV2] is displayed as a reminder.

    Level 3

    Remote amperage control is not avail-

  • able in level 3.
  • Page 70

    Includes all the functions of levels 1 and 2 plus the following:

    10% adjustment of preset TIG or Stick Weld Amps

    Select desired process, TIG or Stick, and use Encoder control to adjust amperage +/−

    10% of preset amperage value, up to the limits of the machine. If operator tries to go beyond the 10%, the amperage (right) meter will display [LOCK][LEV3] as a reminder.

    ###################### Pulser ON/Off Control

    Gives operator the ability to turn on/off the Pulser control.

    When parameter change or selection is lim-

  • ited by lock level 3, [LOCK][LEV3] is displayed as a reminder. Level 4
  • Includes all the functions of levels 1, 2, and 3 plus the following:

    Remote Amperage Control

    Allows operator to use remote amperage control if desired. Remote control operates from minimum to maximum of preset amperage value. Connect remote control device according to Section 4-13.

    When parameter change or selection is lim-

  • ited by lock level 4, [LOCK][LEV4] is displayed as a reminder.
  • ############ 6-10. Pulse Welding Display Options

    |1 Encoder Control
    2 Ammeter Parameters Select Display


    Turn Encoder to change between [V/A], [OFF], and [AVG] pulse welding display options.

    [V/A]

    Amperage preset displays peak amperage for both AC and DC TIG pulser. While pulse welding at one pulse per second and above in DC TIG, meters display average

    voltage and amperage. While pulse welding in AC TIG, meter display may not be stable, and are for reference only.

    [OFF]

    Amperage preset displays peak amperage for both AC and DC TIG pulser. Meters display [PULS] [WELD] while pulse welding. Meter Hold function is disabled. While in a non-pulse welding mode, weld voltage and amperage display and meter hold capabilities are not effected.

    [AVG]

    Amperage preset displays average amperage for DC TIG pulser, and peak amperage for AC TIG pulser. While pulse welding at one pulse per second and above in DC TIG, meters display average voltage and amperage. While pulse welding in AC TIG, meter display may not be stable, and are for reference only.

    V/AMETR

    12

    | |---|

    ############ 6-11. DC Meter Calibration

    |1 Encoder Control
    2 Ammeter Parameters Select Display Amperage Calibration: The amperage calibration range is 10 amps.


    To calibrate the machine’s amperage meter to a load bank’s amperage meter, add or subtract the difference between the amperage found on the machine’s amperage meter and the amperage meter on the load bank. For example:

    MachineMeter LoadBankMeter SetMCAL

    Amps 100 A 105 A +5 A 100 A 95 A −5 A

    3 Amperage Switch Pad
    4 Voltage Parameters Select Display Voltage Calibration: The voltage calibration range is 9.9 volts.


    To calibrate voltage, press the Amperage switch pad and [MCAL] [OV]will be displayed.

    To calibrate the machine’s voltage meter to a load bank’s voltage meter, add or subtract the difference between the voltage found on the machine’s voltage meter and the voltage meter on the load bank. For example: MachineMeter LoadBankMeter SetMCAL

    Volts 10.0 V 10.5 V +0.5 V 10.0 V 9.5 V −0.5 V

    OAMCAL

    12

    MCAL OV

    34

    | |---|

    Page 71

    ###### SECTION 7 − MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

    ############ 7-1. Routine Maintenance

    | | | |! Disconnect power before maintaining.| |---|---|---|---|

  • A. Welding Power Source
  • | |= Check = Change = Clean = Repair = Replace

    * To be done by Factory Authorized Service Agent|= Check = Change = Clean = Repair = Replace

    * To be done by Factory Authorized Service Agent|= Check = Change = Clean = Repair = Replace

    * To be done by Factory Authorized Service Agent| |---|---|---|---| |Every 3 Months|Labels

    |Gas Hoses|Weld Terminals| |Every 3 Months

    | Cables And Cords| Cables And Cords| Cables And Cords| |Every 6 Months|:Durning heavy service, clean monthly. * Adjust or clean spark gap

    0.010 (0.254 mm)|:Durning heavy service, clean monthly. * Adjust or clean spark gap

    0.010 (0.254 mm)|:Durning heavy service, clean monthly. * Adjust or clean spark gap

    0.010 (0.254 mm)|

  • B. Cooler
  • | |= Check = Change = Clean = Repair = Replace

    * To be done by Factory Authorized Service Agent|= Check = Change = Clean = Repair = Replace

    * To be done by Factory Authorized Service Agent| |---|---|---| |Every 3 Months|Coolant Strainer, durning heavy service, clean more frequently.|Blow out heat exchanger fins. Check coolant level. Top off with distilled or deionized water if necessary.

    | |Every 6 Months

    |Hoses Labels

    |Hoses Labels

    | |Every 12 Months

    |Replace coolant.|Replace coolant.|

    ############ 7-2. Blowing Out Inside of Unit

    | | |! Do not remove case when

    blowing out inside of unit.

    To blow out unit, direct airflow| |---|---|---| |803 900-B

    through front and back louvers as shown.|803 900-B

    through front and back louvers as shown.|803 900-B

    through front and back louvers as shown.|

    ############ 7-3. Coolant Maintenance

    | | | | | |![image 68](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile68.png)|! Disconnect input power be-

    fore maintaining. 1 Coolant Filter|

    Page 72

    |---|---|---|---|---|---|---| |m30 Torx

    Tools Needed:

    804 649-A / Ref. 801 194

    Unscrew housing to clean filter.

    Changing coolant: Drain coolant by tipping unit to rear, or use suction pump. Fill with clean water and run for 10 minutes. Drain and refill with coolant (see section 4-21).

    If replacing hoses, use hoses compatible with ethylene glycol, such as Buna-n, Neoprene, or Hypalon. Oxy-acetylene hoses are not compatible with any product containing ethylene glycol.

    1|m30 Torx

    Tools Needed:

    804 649-A / Ref. 801 194

    Unscrew housing to clean filter.

    Changing coolant: Drain coolant by tipping unit to rear, or use suction pump. Fill with clean water and run for 10 minutes. Drain and refill with coolant (see section 4-21).

    If replacing hoses, use hoses compatible with ethylene glycol, such as Buna-n, Neoprene, or Hypalon. Oxy-acetylene hoses are not compatible with any product containing ethylene glycol.

    1|m30 Torx

    Tools Needed:

    804 649-A / Ref. 801 194

    Unscrew housing to clean filter.

    Changing coolant: Drain coolant by tipping unit to rear, or use suction pump. Fill with clean water and run for 10 minutes. Drain and refill with coolant (see section 4-21).

    If replacing hoses, use hoses compatible with ethylene glycol, such as Buna-n, Neoprene, or Hypalon. Oxy-acetylene hoses are not compatible with any product containing ethylene glycol.

    1|m30 Torx

    Tools Needed:

    804 649-A / Ref. 801 194

    Unscrew housing to clean filter.

    Changing coolant: Drain coolant by tipping unit to rear, or use suction pump. Fill with clean water and run for 10 minutes. Drain and refill with coolant (see section 4-21).

    If replacing hoses, use hoses compatible with ethylene glycol, such as Buna-n, Neoprene, or Hypalon. Oxy-acetylene hoses are not compatible with any product containing ethylene glycol.

    1|m30 Torx

    Tools Needed:

    804 649-A / Ref. 801 194

    Unscrew housing to clean filter.

    Changing coolant: Drain coolant by tipping unit to rear, or use suction pump. Fill with clean water and run for 10 minutes. Drain and refill with coolant (see section 4-21).

    If replacing hoses, use hoses compatible with ethylene glycol, such as Buna-n, Neoprene, or Hypalon. Oxy-acetylene hoses are not compatible with any product containing ethylene glycol.

    1|m30 Torx

    Tools Needed:

    804 649-A / Ref. 801 194

    Unscrew housing to clean filter.

    Changing coolant: Drain coolant by tipping unit to rear, or use suction pump. Fill with clean water and run for 10 minutes. Drain and refill with coolant (see section 4-21).

    If replacing hoses, use hoses compatible with ethylene glycol, such as Buna-n, Neoprene, or Hypalon. Oxy-acetylene hoses are not compatible with any product containing ethylene glycol.

    1|m30 Torx

    Tools Needed:

    804 649-A / Ref. 801 194

    Unscrew housing to clean filter.

    Changing coolant: Drain coolant by tipping unit to rear, or use suction pump. Fill with clean water and run for 10 minutes. Drain and refill with coolant (see section 4-21).

    If replacing hoses, use hoses compatible with ethylene glycol, such as Buna-n, Neoprene, or Hypalon. Oxy-acetylene hoses are not compatible with any product containing ethylene glycol.

    1|

    ############ 7-4. Troubleshooting

  • A. Voltmeter/Ammeter And Cooler Help Displays
  • |All directions are in reference to the front of the unit. All circuitry referred to is located inside the unit.

    1 Typical Voltmeter/Ammeter Numbered Help Displays - 30 Numbers are for 350 Models Or Top Engine Of 700 Models. 40 Numbers Are For Bottom Engine Of 700 Models.

    Help 30 Display

    Indicates a short or open in the thermal protection circuitry located in the input inductor of the unit. Contact a Factory Authorized Service Agent if this display is shown.

    Help 31 Display


    Indicates a malfunction in the primary power circuit caused by an overcurrent condition in the primary IGBT switching circuit. Contact a Factory Authorized Service Agent if this display is shown.

    Help 32 Display

    Indicates a short or open in the thermal protection circuitry located on the left side of the unit. Contact a Factory Authorized Service Agent if this display is shown.

    Help 34 Display

    Indicates a short or open in the thermal protection circuitry located on the right side of the unit. Contact a Factory Authorized Service Agent if this display is shown.

    Help 8 Display

    Indicates a malfunction in the secondary power circuit of the unit. There is a high open circuit condition. Contact a Factory Authorized Service Agent if this display is shown.

    Help 14 Display Unit not ready. Primary circuit bus not up to full power.

    Help 16 Display

    Secondary clamp voltage too high. Straighten out or shorten weld cables. If this does not correct the problem, contact a Factory Authorized Service Agent.

    Help 20 Display

    Indicates that the power supplies for the primary drives have failed. Contact a Factory Authorized Service Agent if this display is shown.

    Help 21 Display

    Indicates voltage or current feedback has been detected with contactor off. Contact a Factory Authorized Service Agent if this display is shown.

    Help 22 Display


    Voltage and current not present with contactor on. Contact a Factory Authorized Service Agent if this display is shown.

    Help 24 Display

    Indicates a power supply to the control and interface board PC6 failure. Possible cause is a short in Pin A or Pin B of the remote control.

    1

    V

    |HELP| |---|

    |30| |---|

    A

    2 Typical Voltmeter/Ammeter Worded Help Displays. [TOP] or [BOT] will display after the message to identify the affected engine on 700 models.


    [Over][Temp] On for two seconds then flashes:

    [Sec] − Indicates the left side of the unit has overheated. The unit has shut down to allow the fan to cool it (see Section 4-4). Operation will continue when the unit has cooled.

    [PRI] − Indicates the right side of the unit has overheated. The unit has shut down to allow the fan to cool it (see Section 4-4). Operation will continue when the unit has cooled.

    [InD] − Indicates that the input inductor has overheated. The unit has shut down to allow the fans to cool it (see Section 4-4). Operation will continue when the unit has cooled.

    [LOW][LINE]

    Indicates that the input voltage is too low, and the unit has automatically shut down. Operation will continue when the voltage is within the operating range (10%). Have an electrician check the input voltage if this display is shown.

    [HIGH][LINE]

    Indicates that the input voltage is too high, and the unit has automatically shut down. Operation will continue when the voltage is within the operating range (10%). Have an electrician check the input voltage if this display is shown.

    [REL][RMT]

    Indicates that the torch trigger is depressed. Release trigger to continue.

    [not][VALD]

    Indicates a non-allowable set-up on the front panel.

    [AUTO][STop] Output disable open causing weld output to stop, but gas continues to flow.

    [Out][LIMT]

    Indicates a primary overpower condition. Output current is decreased to limit primary power draw. Depress any switch pad and turn encoder or strike an arc to clear the last help condition.

    [ADV][AUTO]

    Indicates a non-allowable setup on the front panel due to an Advanced Automation selection being active (see Section 6).

    [LOCK][LEV 1] 2, 3, or 4

    Indicates a non-allowable setup on the front panel due to the current lockout selection (see Section 6-9).

    [ERR][GND]

    Turn Off input power and have qualified person inspect unit. To clear error, turn power Off and back On.

    Error is displayed only if option is installed and error occurs.

    Err GND indicates current is present on green or green/yellow grounding conductor. As a result, machine weld output is disabled.

    ERR GND may be caused by a live conductor contacting the chassis. ERR GND may be caused by work clamp not connected to work piece.

    | |---|

    ############### B. Troubleshooting Table

    | | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---|---|

    |Trouble|Remedy| |---|---| |No weld output; unit completely inoperative.

    |Place line disconnect switch in On position (see Section 4-10).| |No weld output; unit completely inoperative.

    |Check and replace line fuse(s), if necessary, or reset circuit breaker (see Section 4-10).| |No weld output; unit completely inoperative.

    |Check for proper input power connections (see Section 4-10).| |No weld output; meter display On.

    |If using remote control, be sure correct process is enabled to provide output control at Remote 14 receptacle (see Sections 5-1 and 4-13).| |No weld output; meter display On.

    |Input voltage outside acceptable range of variation (see Section 4-9).| |No weld output; meter display On.

    |Check, repair, or replace remote control.| |No weld output; meter display On.

    |Unit overheated and [Over][Temp] is displayed. Allow unit to cool with fan On (see Section 4-4).| |Erratic or improper weld output.

    |Use proper size and type of weld cable (see Section 4-12).| |Erratic or improper weld output.

    |Clean and tighten all weld and gas connections.| |No 115 volts ac output at duplex receptacle.|Reset circuit breaker CB1 (see Section 4-18).| |Fan not operating. Fan only runs when cooling is necessary.

    |Check for and remove anything blocking fan movement.| |Fan not operating. Fan only runs when cooling is necessary.

    |Have Factory Authorized Service Agent check fan motor.| |Wandering arc|Use proper size tungsten (see Section 11-1).| |Wandering arc|Use properly prepared tungsten (see Section 11-2).|

    Page 73

    |Wandering arc|Reduce gas flow rate.| |Tungsten electrode oxidizing and not remaining bright after conclusion of weld.|Shield weld zone from drafts.| |Tungsten electrode oxidizing and not remaining bright after conclusion of weld.|Increase postflow time (see Section 5-12).| |Tungsten electrode oxidizing and not remaining bright after conclusion of weld.|Check and tighten all gas fittings.| |Tungsten electrode oxidizing and not remaining bright after conclusion of weld.|Water in torch. Refer to torch manual.|

    ###### SECTION 8 − ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | |

    Figure 8-1. Circuit Diagram For Dynasty 350 Models

    | | | |---|---| | | | | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | | | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | |

    Page 74

    |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | |

    | | | | | |---|---|---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

    Page 75

    | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

    ######################## 243 217-C

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | |

    ############### Figure 8-2. Circuit Diagram For Maxstar 350 Models

    | | | |---|---| | | | | | |

    | | | |---|---|

    Page 76

    | | | | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | | | |---|---|---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

    Page 77

    | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

    ######################## 243 215-C

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    ############### Figure 8-3. Circuit Diagram For Dynasty 700 Models (Part 1 of 2)

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    Page 78

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | | | | |

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | |

    ############### Figure 8-4. Circuit Diagram For Dynasty 700 Models (Part 2 of 2)

    | | | |---|---| | | | | | |

    | | | | | |---|---|---|---| | | | | |

    Page 79

    | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

    | | | |---|---|

    Page 80

    | | | | | |

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    ############### Figure 8-5. Circuit Diagram For Maxstar 700 Models (Part 1 of 2)

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | | | | |

    ######################## 243 216-C

    | | | | |---|---|---| | | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    Page 81

    ############### Figure 8-6. Circuit Diagram For Maxstar 700 Models (Part 2 of 2)

    | | | |---|---| | | | | | |

    | | | | | |---|---|---|---| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

    Page 82

    | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | | | | |

    ######################## 243 216-C

    | | | |---|---| | | | | | |

    ############### Figure 8-7. Circuit Diagram For Cooler

    228 525-B

    ###### SECTION 9 − HIGH FREQUENCY

    ############ 9-1. Welding Processes Requiring High Frequency

    1

    |Work| |---|

    TIG

    Page 83

    1 High-Frequency Voltage

    TIG − helps arc jump air gap between torch and workpiece and/ or stabilize the arc.

    high_freq 5/10 − S-0693

    ############ 9-2. Installation Showing Possible Sources Of HF Interference

    13

    50 ft (15 m)

    ###################### Weld Zone

    11, 12

    9 8

    7

    1

    10

    3

    2

    4 5 6

    14

    ####### Best Practices Not Followed

    Sources of Direct High-Frequency Radiation

  • 1 High-Frequency Source (welding power source with built-in HF or separate HF unit)
  • 2 Weld Cables
  • 3 Torch
  • Page 84

  • 4 Work Clamp
  • 5 Workpiece
  • 6 Work Table
  • Sources of Conduction of High Frequency
  • 7 Input Power Cable
  • 8 Line Disconnect Device
  • 9 Input Supply Wiring
  • Sources of Reradiation of High Frequency
  • 10 Ungrounded Metal Objects
  • 11 Lighting
  • 12 Wiring
  • 13 Water Pipes and Fixtures
  • 14 External Phone and Power Lines
  • S-0694

    ############ 9-3. Recommended Installation To Reduce HF Interference

    ###################### Weld Zone

    3 50 ft (15 m)

    50 ft (15 m)

    5

    1

    6

    2

    8

    Page 85

    4

    8

    Ground all metal objects and all wiring in welding zone using #12 AWG wire.

    Ground workpiece if required by codes.

    Nonmetal Building

    7

    9

    ####### Best Practices Followed

    ###################### Metal Building

    8

    8

    11

    10

    Ref. S-0695 / Ref. S-0695

  • 1 High-Frequency Source (welding power source with built-in HF or separate HF unit)
  • Ground metal machine case (clean paint from around hole in case, and use case screw), work output terminal, line disconnect device, input supply, and worktable.

  • 2 Center Point of Welding Zone
  • Midpoint between high-frequency source and welding torch.

  • 3 Welding Zone
  • A circle 50 ft (15 m) from center point in all directions.

    Page 86

  • 4 Weld Output Cables
  • Keep cables short and close together.

  • 5 Conduit Joint Bonding and Grounding
  • Electrically join (bond) all conduit sections using copper straps or braided wire. Ground conduit every 50 ft (15 m).

  • 6 Water Pipes and Fixtures Ground water pipes every 50 ft (15 m).
  • 7 External Power or Telephone Lines
  • Locate high-frequency source at least 50 ft (15 m) away from power and phone lines.

  • 8 Grounding Rod
  • Consult the National Electrical Code for specifications.

    ###################### Metal Building Requirements

  • 9 Metal Building Panel Bonding Methods
  • Bolt or weld building panels together, install copper straps or braided wire across seams, and ground frame.

  • 10 Windows and Doorways
  • Cover all windows and doorways with grounded copper screen of not more than 1/4 in (6.4 mm) mesh.

  • 11 Overhead Door Track Ground the track.
  • ###### SECTION 10 − SETUP GUIDES FOR (GTAW) TIG WELDING

    ############ 10-1. Typical GTAW Setups

    ############### A. AC − GTAW 1/8 in. Aluminum Setup (Dynasty Models Only)

    Page 87

    | | | | | | |---|---|---|---|---| | | | | | |

    | | | |---|---| | | |

    This symbol indicates which functions should be active for aluminum welding.

    Some of the controls shown above may not be on your machine (Dynasty 350/700 illustrated).

  •  Turn power on (switch located on rear panel).
  •  Press Polarity switch pad until AC LED is lit.
  •  Press Process switch pad until TIG HF Impulse LED is lit.
  •  Press Output switch pad until RMT STD LED is lit.
  •  Press Adjust switch pad until Post Flow LED is lit.
  •  Turn Encoder control to set 15 seconds of Post Flow time.
  •  Press AC Waveshape switch pad until Balance LED is lit.
  •  Turn Encoder control to set desired Balance (65 - 80%).
  •  Press AC Waveshape switch pad until AC Frequency LED is lit.
  •  Turn Encoder control to set desired AC Frequency (100 - 150 Hz).
  •  Press AC Waveshape switch pad until EN Amperage or EP Amperage LED is lit.
  •  Turn Encoder control to set desired ratio: typically in the range of (75A EP / 100A EN) to (50A EP / 100A EN).
  •  Press Amperage A switch pad until LED is lit.
  •  Turn Encoder control to set desired amperage (125 - 160 amps).
  •  Pulser Controls (if applicable, see Section 5-10).
  • 226 868-B

    The ammeter displays the parameter for any of the following units of measure when they are active: amperage, time, percentage, or frequency. The corresponding LED, located directly below the ammeter, will also light up. The ammeter also displays actual amperage while welding.

    ############### B. DC - GTAW 16 Gauge Mild Steel* And Stainless Steel Setup

    |This symbol indicates which functions should be active for stainless or mild steel welding. Some of the controls shown above may not be on your machine (Dynasty 350/700 illustrated).

     Turn power on (switch located on rear panel)
     Press Polarity switch pad until DC LED is lit (Dynasty Models Only)
     Press Process switch pad until TIG HF Impulse LED is lit
     Press Output switch pad until RMT STD LED is lit
     Press Adjust switch pad until Post Flow LED is lit
     Turn Encoder control to set 8 seconds of Post Flow time
     Press Amperage A switch pad until LED is lit
     Turn Encoder control to set desired amperage (50 - 80 amps for stainless steel) or (55 to 88 amps for mild steel*).
     Pulser Controls (if applicable, see Section 5-10).


    The ammeter displays the parameter for any of the following units of measure when they are active: amperage, time, percentage, or frequency. The corresponding LED, located directly below the ammeter, will also light up. The ammeter also displays actual amperage while welding.

    226 868-B| |---|

    Page 88

    OM 216 896 Page 94

    ###### SECTION 11 − SELECTING AND PREPARING A TUNGSTEN FOR DC OR AC WELDING WITH INVERTER MACHINES

    gtaw_Inverter_2010-04

    | | |Whenever possible and practical, use DC weld output instead of AC weld output.| |---|---|---|

    ############ 11-1. Selecting Tungsten Electrode (Wear Clean gloves To Prevent Contamination Of Tungsten)

    Amperage Range - Gas Type - Polarity Electrode Diameter (DCEN) − Argon

    AC − Argon Balance Control @ 65% Electrode Negative (For Use With Aluminum) 2% Ceria (Orange Band), 1.5% Lanthanum (Gray Band), Or 2% Thorium (Red Band) Alloy Tungstens

    Direct Current Electrode Negative (For Use With Mild Or Stainless Steel)

    .010 in. (1 mm) Up to 25 Up to 20

    .020 in. (1 mm) 15-40 15-35 .040 in. (1 mm) 25-85 20-80 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) 50-160 50-150 3/32 in. (2.4 mm) 130-250 135-235

    1/8 in. (3.2 mm) 250-400 225-360 5/32 in. (4.0 mm) 400-500 300-450 3/16 in (4.8 mm) 500-750 400-500 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) 750-1000 600-800

    Typical argon shielding gas flow rates are 11 to 35 cfh (cubic feet per hour). Figures listed are a guide and are a composite of recommendations from American Welding Society (AWS) and electrode manufacturers.

    ############ 11-2. Preparing Tungsten Electrode For DC Electrode Negative (DCEN) Welding Or ACWelding With Inverter Machines

    | | |Grinding the tungsten electrode produces dust and flying sparks which can cause injury and start fires. Use local exhaust (forced ventilation) at the grinder or wear an approved respirator. Read MSDS for safety information. Consider using tungsten containing ceria, lanthana, or yttria instead of thoria. Grinding dust| |---|---|---| |from thoriated electrodes contains low-level radioactive material. Properly dispose of grinder dust in an environmentally safe way. Wear proper face, hand, and body protection. Keep flammables away.|from thoriated electrodes contains low-level radioactive material. Properly dispose of grinder dust in an environmentally safe way. Wear proper face, hand, and body protection. Keep flammables away.|from thoriated electrodes contains low-level radioactive material. Properly dispose of grinder dust in an environmentally safe way. Wear proper face, hand, and body protection. Keep flammables away.|

    |Ideal Tungsten Preparation − Stable Arc

    2-1/2 Times Electrode Diameter

    1 Grinding Wheel

    Grind end of tungsten on fine grit, hard abrasive wheel before welding. Do not use wheel for other jobs or tungsten can become contaminated causing lower weld quality.

    2 Tungsten Electrode A 2% ceriated tungsten is recommended.
    3 Flat

    Diameter of this flat determines amperage capacity.

    4 Straight Ground Grind lengthwise, not radial.


    1

    3

    4

    Causes Wandering Arc

    2

    Wrong Tungsten

    Radial Grinding

    Preparation| |---|

    Page 89

    ###### SECTION 12 − GUIDELINES FOR TIG WELDING (GTAW)

  • 12-1. Positioning The Torch
  • |Ref. ST-161 892

    1

    10−25

    10−15

    6

    2

    3

    4

    90

    4

    5

    3/16 in.

    1/16 in.

    6

    5

    Bottom View Of Gas Cup

    ! Grinding the tungsten electrode produces dust and flying sparks which can cause injury and start fires. Use local exhaust (forced ventilation) at the grinder or wear an approved respirator. Read MSDS for safety information. Consider using cerium or lanthanum based tungsten instead of thoriated. Thorium dust contains low-level radioactive material. Properly dispose of grinder dust in an environmentally safe way. Wear proper face, hand, and body protection. Keep flammables away.

    1 Workpiece

    Make sure workpiece is clean before welding.

    2 Work Clamp Place as close to the weld as possible.
    3 Torch
    4 Filler Rod (If Applicable)
    5 Gas Cup
    6 Tungsten Electrode


    Select and prepare tungsten according to Section 11.

    Guidelines:

    The inside diameter of the gas cup should be at least three times the tungsten diameter to provide adequate shielding gas coverage. (For example, if tungsten is 1/16 in. diameter, gas cup should be a minimum of 3/16 in. diameter.

    Tungsten extension is the distance the tungsten extends out gas cup of torch.

    The tungsten extension should be no greater than the inside diameter of the gas cup.

    Arc length is the distance from the tungsten to the workpiece.

    | |---|

  • 12-2. Torch Movement During Welding
  • |ST-162 002-B

    Tungsten Without Filler Rod

    Tungsten With Filler Rod

    Form pool Tilt torch Move torch to front of pool. Repeat process.

    75

    75Welding direction

    Form pool Tilt torch Add filler metal

    Move torch to front of pool. Repeat process.

    Remove rod

    Welding direction 15

    | |---|

  • 12-3. Positioning Torch Tungsten For Various Weld Joints
  • |ST-162 003 / S-0792

    75

    70

    90

    20

    20

    10 15



    75

    20-40

    30

    15

    75

    90

    15

    Butt Weld And Stringer Bead “T” Joint

    Lap Joint Corner Joint| |---|

    ###### SECTION 13 − SETUP GUIDES FOR (SMAW) STICK WELDING

  • 13-1. Front Panel Display For Stick DCEP (Direct Current Electrode Positive)
  • |216 869-B

    Some of the controls shown above may not be on your machine (Dynasty 350/700 illustrated).

    Gray on nameplate indicates a Stick function (see Section 5-1 for description of controls).

    This symbol indicates which functions should be active for Stick DCEP (Direct Current Electrode Positive) welding.

     Turn power on (switch located on rear panel)
     Press Polarity switch pad until DC LED is lit (Dynasty Models Only)
     Press Process switch pad until STICK LED is lit
     Press Output switch pad until ON LED is lit
     Press Amperage A switch pad until LED is lit
     Turn Encoder control to set desired amperage.


    The ammeter displays the parameter for any of the following units of measure when they are active: amperage, time, percentage, or frequency. The corresponding LED, located directly below the ammeter, will also light up. The ammeter also displays actual amperage while welding.

    | |---|

    ###### SECTION 14 − STICK WELDING (SMAW) GUIDELINES

    ############ 14-1. Stick Welding Procedure

    Tools Needed: Equipment Needed:

    Constant Current Welding Power Source

    Page 90

    5

    4

    2

    3

    6

    1

    7

    ! Weld current starts when electrode touches workpiece.

    ! Weld current can damage electronic parts in vehicles. Disconnect both battery cables before welding on a vehicle. Place work clamp as close to the weld as possible.

    Always wear appropriate personal protective clothing.

  • 1 Workpiece
  • Make sure workpiece is clean before welding.

  • 2 Work Clamp
  • 3 Electrode
  • A small diameter electrode requires less current than a large one. Follow electrode manufacturer’s instructions when setting weld amperage (see Section 14-2).

  • 4 Insulated Electrode Holder
  • 5 Electrode Holder Position
  • 6 Arc Length
  • Arc length is the distance from the electrode to the workpiece. A short arc with correct amperage will give a sharp, crackling sound.

  • 7 Slag
  • Page 91

    Use a chipping hammer and wire brush to remove slag. Remove slag and check weld bead before making another weld pass.

    stick 2010−02 − 151 593

    ############ 14-2. Electrode and Amperage Selection Chart

    |ELECTRODE|DIAMETER|AMPERAGE

    RANGE|AMPERAGE

    RANGE|AMPERAGE

    RANGE|AMPERAGE

    RANGE|AMPERAGE

    RANGE|AMPERAGE

    RANGE|AMPERAGE

    RANGE|AMPERAGE

    RANGE|AMPERAGE

    RANGE| |---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---| |ELECTRODE|DIAMETER|50

    100

    150

    200

    250

    300

    350

    400

    450|50

    100

    150

    200

    250

    300

    350

    400

    450|50

    100

    150

    200

    250

    300

    350

    400

    450|50

    100

    150

    200

    250

    300

    350

    400

    450|50

    100

    150

    200

    250

    300

    350

    400

    450|50

    100

    150

    200

    250

    300

    350

    400

    450|50

    100

    150

    200

    250

    300

    350

    400

    450|50

    100

    150

    200

    250

    300

    350

    400

    450|50

    100

    150

    200

    250

    300

    350

    400

    450| |6010 &
    6011
    |3/32| | | | | | | | | | |6010 &
    6011
    |1/8| | | | | | | | | | |6010 &
    6011
    |5/32| | | | | | | | | | |6010 &
    6011
    |3/16| | | | | | | | | | |6010 &
    6011
    |7/32| | | | | | | | | | |6010 &
    6011
    |1/4| | | | | | | | | | |6013|1/16| | | | | | | | | | |6013|5/64| | | | | | | | | | |6013|3/32| | | | | | | | | | |6013|1/8| | | | | | | | | | |6013|5/32| | | | | | | | | | |6013|3/16| | | | | | | | | | |6013|7/32| | | | | | | | | | |6013|1/4| | | | | | | | | | |7014|3/32| | | | | | | | | | |7014|1/8| | | | | | | | | | |7014|5/32| | | | | | | | | | |7014|3/16| | | | | | | | | | |7014|7/32| | | | | | | | | | |7014|1/4| | | | | | | | | | |7018|3/32| | | | | | | | | | |7018|1/8| | | | | | | | | | |7018|5/32| | | | | | | | | | |7018|3/16| | | | | | | | | | |7018|7/32| | | | | | | | | | |7018|1/4| | | | | | | | | | |7024|3/32| | | | | | | | | | |7024|1/8| | | | | | | | | | |7024|5/32| | | | | | | | | | |7024|3/16| | | | | | | | | |

    Page 92

    |7024|7/32| | | | | | | | | | |7024|1/4| | | | | | | | | | |Ni-Cl|3/32| | | | | | | | | | |Ni-Cl|1/8| | | | | | | | | | |Ni-Cl|5/32| | | | | | | | | | |Ni-Cl|3/16| | | | | | | | | | |308L|3/32| | | | | | | | | | |308L|1/8| | | | | | | | | | |308L|5/32| | | | | | | | | |

    |ELECTRODE|DC*

    |AC|POSITION

    |PENETRATION|USAGE| |---|---|---|---|---|---| |6010|EP| |ALL|DEEP|MIN. PREP, ROUGH HIGH SPATTER| |6011|EP| |ALL|DEEP|MIN. PREP, ROUGH HIGH SPATTER| |6013|EP,EN| |ALL|LOW|GENERAL| |7014|EP,EN| |ALL|MED|SMOOTH, EASY, FAST| |7018|EP| |ALL|MED|LOW HYDROGEN, STRONG| |7024|EP,EN| |FLAT HORIZ FILLET|LOW|SMOOTH, EASY, FASTER| |NI-CL|EP| |ALL|LOW|CAST IRON| |308L|EP| |ALL|LOW|STAINLESS| |*EP = ELECTRODE POSITIVE (REVERSE POLARITY)|*EP = ELECTRODE POSITIVE (REVERSE POLARITY)|*EP = ELECTRODE POSITIVE (REVERSE POLARITY)|*EP = ELECTRODE POSITIVE (REVERSE POLARITY)|*EP = ELECTRODE POSITIVE (REVERSE POLARITY)|*EP = ELECTRODE POSITIVE (REVERSE POLARITY)|

    EN = ELECTRODE NEGATIVE (STRAIGHT POLARITY)

    Ref. S-087 985-A

    ############ 14-3. Striking an Arc

    1

    2

    3

    1

    2

    Page 93

    3

  • 1 Electrode
  • 2 Workpiece
  • 3 Arc Scratch Technique
  • Drag electrode across workpiece like striking a match; lift electrode slightly after touching work. If arc goes out, electrode was lifted too high. If electrode sticks to workpiece, use a quick twist to free it.

    ###################### Tapping Technique

    Bring electrode straight down to workpiece; then lift slightly to start arc. If arc goes out, electrode was lifted too high. If electrode sticks to workpiece, use a quick twist to free it.

    S-0049 / S-0050

    ############ 14-4. Positioning Electrode Holder

    1

    10-30

    2

    90 90

    Groove Welds

    45 10-30

    2

    1

    45

    Fillet Welds

    ############ 14-5. Poor Weld Bead Characteristics

    Page 94

    4 2 3

    | | | |---|---|

    5

    1

    ############ 14-6. Good Weld Bead Characteristics

    1

    5234

  • 1 End View Of Work Angle
  • 2 Side View Of Electrode Angle
  • S-0060

  • 1 Large Spatter Deposits
  • 2 Rough, Uneven Bead
  • 3 Slight Crater During Welding
  • 4 Bad Overlap
  • 5 Poor Penetration
  • S-0053-A

  • 1 Fine Spatter
  • 2 Uniform Bead
  • 3 Moderate Crater During Welding
  • Weld a new bead or layer for each 1/8 in. (3.2 mm) thickness in metals being welded.

  • 4 No Overlap
  • Page 95

  • 5 Good Penetration into Base Metal
  • S-0052-B

    ############ 14-7. Conditions That Affect Weld Bead Shape

    Electrode Angle

    Arc Length

    Travel Speed

    Correct Angle

    Angle Too Small Angle Too Large

    10 - 30

    Drag

    Spatter

    Too Short Normal Too Long

    Slow Normal Fast

    ############ 14-8. Electrode Movement During Welding

    Weld bead shape is affected by electrode angle, arc length, travel speed, and thickness of base metal.

    S-0061

    1 2

    3

    Normally, a single stringer bead is satisfactory for most narrow groove weld joints; however, for wide groove weld joints or bridging across gaps, a weave bead or multiple stringer beads work better.

    Page 96

  • 1 Stringer Bead − Steady Movement Along Seam
  • 2 Weave Bead − Side to Side Movement Along Seam
  • 3 Weave Patterns
  • Use weave patterns to cover a wide area in one pass of the electrode. Do not let weave width exceed 2-1/2 times diameter of electrode.

    S-0054-A

    ############ 14-9. Groove (Butt) Joints

    1

    2

    30

    1/16 in. (1.6 mm)

    3 4

  • 1 Tack Welds
  • Prevent edges of joint from drawing together ahead of electrode by tack welding the materials in position before final weld.

  • 2 Square Groove Weld
  • Good for materials up to 3/16 in. (5 mm) thick.

  • 3 Single V-Groove Weld
  • Good for materials 3/16 − 3/4 in. (5-19 mm) thick. Cut bevel with oxyacetylene or plasma cutting equipment. Remove scale from material after cutting. A grinder can also be used to prepare bevels.

    Create 30 degree angle of bevel on materials in V-groove welding.

  • 4 Double V-Groove Weld
  • Good for materials thicker than 3/16 in. (5 mm).

    Page 97

    S-0062

    ############ 14-10.Lap Joint

    30 Or Less

    30 Or Less

    1 1

    2 3

  • 1 Electrode
  • 2 Single-Layer Fillet Weld Move electrode in circular motion.
  • 3 Multi-Layer Fillet Weld
  • Weld a second layer when a heavier fillet is needed. Remove slag before making another weld pass. Weld both sides of joint for maximum strength.

    S-0063 / S-0064

    ############ 14-11. Tee Joint

    1

    1

    45

    Or Less

    2

    32

  • 1 Electrode
  • 2 Fillet Weld
  • Page 98

    Keep arc short and move at definite rate of speed. Hold electrode as shown to provide fusion into the corner. Square edge of the weld surface.

    For maximum strength weld both sides of upright section.

  • 3 Multi-Layer Deposits
  • Weld a second layer when a heavier fillet is needed. Use any of the weaving patterns shown in Section 14-8. Remove slag before making another weld pass.

    S-0060 / S-0058-A / S-0061

    ############ 14-12.Weld Test

    3

    3

    2 To 3 in.

    (51-76 mm)

    2 To 3 in.

    (51-76 mm)

    2

    2 1

    1/4 in.

    (6.4 mm)

    1

  • 1 Vise
  • 2 Weld Joint
  • 3 Hammer
  • Page 99

    Strike weld joint in direction shown. A good weld bends over but does not break.

    S-0057-B

    ############ 14-13.Troubleshooting

    | |Porosity − small cavities or holes resulting from gas pockets in weld metal.| |---|---| |Possible Causes|Corrective Actions| |Arc length too long.|Reduce arc length.| |Damp electrode.|Use dry electrode.| |Workpiece dirty.|Remove all grease, oil, moisture, rust, paint, coatings, slag, and dirt from work surface before welding.| | |Excessive Spatter − scattering of molten metal particles that cool to solid form near weld bead.| |Possible Causes|Corrective Actions| |Amperage too high for electrode.|Decrease amperage or select larger electrode.| |Arc length too long or voltage too high.|Reduce arc length or voltage.| | |Incomplete Fusion − failure of weld metal to fuse completely with base metal or a preceeding weld bead.| |Possible Causes|Corrective Actions| |Insufficient heat input.|Increase amperage. Select larger electrode and increase amperage.| |Improper welding technique.

    |Place stringer bead in proper location(s) at joint during welding.| |Improper welding technique.

    |Adjust work angle or widen groove to access bottom during welding.| |Improper welding technique.

    |Momentarily hold arc on groove side walls when using weaving technique.| |Improper welding technique.

    |Keep arc on leading edge of weld puddle.| |Workpiece dirty.|Remove all grease, oil, moisture, rust, paint, coatings, slag, and dirt from work surface before welding.|

    |Lack of Penetration Good Penetration|Lack Of Penetration − shallow fusion between weld metal and base metal.| |---|---| |Possible Causes|Corrective Actions| |Improper joint preparation.|Material too thick. Joint preparation and design must provide access to bottom of groove.| |Improper weld technique.|Keep arc on leading edge of weld puddle.| |Insufficient heat input.

    |Increase amperage. Select larger electrode and increase amperage.| |Insufficient heat input.

    |Reduce travel speed.| |Good PenetrationExcessive Penetration|Excessive Penetration − weld metal melting through base metal and hanging underneath weld.| |Possible Causes|Corrective Actions| |Excessive heat input.

    |Select lower amperage. Use smaller electrode.| |Excessive heat input.

    |Increase and/or maintain steady travel speed.| | |Burn-Through − weld metal melting completely through base metal resulting in holes where no metal remains.|

    Page 100

    |Possible Causes|Corrective Actions| |Excessive heat input.

    |Select lower amperage. Use smaller electrode.| |Excessive heat input.

    |Increase and/or maintain steady travel speed.| | |Waviness Of Bead − weld metal that is not parallel and does not cover joint formed by base metal.| |Possible Causes|Corrective Actions| |Unsteady hand.|Use two hands. Practice technique.| |Base metal moves in the direction of the weld bead.|Distortion − contraction of weld metal during welding that forces base metal to move.| |Possible Causes|Corrective Actions| |Excessive heat input.

    |Use restraint (clamp) to hold base metal in position.| |Excessive heat input.

    |Make tack welds along joint before starting welding operation.| |Excessive heat input.

    |Select lower amperage for electrode.| |Excessive heat input.

    |Increase travel speed.| |Excessive heat input.

    |Weld in small segments and allow cooling between welds.|

    ###### SECTION 15 − PARTS LIST FOR 350 MODELS

    Hardware is common and not available unless listed.

    6

    4

    5

    2

    27

    24

    26 25

    33 Dynasty Only

    21

    7

    Page 101

    8

    10

    9

    34

    28

    29

    30 19

    31

    33

    Maxstar Qty 2 Dynasty Qty 1

    32

    17

    19

    20

    18

    12

    16

    3

    23

    1 22

    Page 102

    Dynasty 350 illustrated

    14

    13

    15

    ############### Figure 15-1. Main Assembly

    805 471-B

    Item No.

    Dia. Mkgs.

    Part No.

    Description

    Quantity

    Figure 15-1. Main Assembly

  • 1 224 519 LABEL, SIDE DYNASTY 350 2... .......... .. .........................................
  • 1 224 525 LABEL, SIDE MAXSTAR 350 2... .......... .. .........................................
  • 2 224 516 INSULATOR, SIDE 2... .......... .. ..................................................
  • 3 216 878 PANEL, SIDE 2... .......... .. ......................................................
  • 4 +213 056 WRAPPER, TOP 1... ......... .. ...................................................
  • 5 203 990 LABEL, WARNING GENERAL PRECAUTIONARY WORDLESS 1... .......... .. .........
  • 5 179 310 LABEL, WARNING GENERAL PRECAUTIONARY WORDLESS, (CE) 1... .......... .. .....
  • 6 213 073 SEAL, LIFT EYE 1... .......... .. ....................................................
  • 7 213 058 LIFT EYE, 1... .......... .. .........................................................
  • 8 T2 226 917 XFMR, 665 115/24 18/18 220 1... .... .. .. .........................................
  • Page 103

  • 9 155 436 LABEL, GROUND/PROTECTIVE EARTH 1... .......... .. ..............................
  • 10 218 170 HOSE, NPRN BRD NO 1 X .250 ID X 25.000 1... .......... .. ...........................
  • 12 Figure 15-3 PANEL, REAR W/COMPONENTS 1... ....... .. ....................................
  • 13 222 760 BRACKET, FILTER BOARD 1... .......... .. ..........................................
  • 14 PC19 233 152 CIRCUIT CARD ASSY, FILTER (CE) 1... .. . .. .................................
  • 15 Figure 15-5 HEAT SINK, PRIMARY ASSY 1... ....... .. ........................................
  • 16 Figure 15-4 WINDTUNNEL, RIGHT HAND W/COMPONENTS 1... ....... .. ......................
  • 17 Figure 15-7 HEAT SINK, SECONDARY − DYNASTY 350 1... ....... .. ...........................
  • 17 Figure 15-8 HEAT SINK, SECONDARY − MAXSTAR 350 1... ....... .. ...........................
  • 18 PC7 235 476 CIRCUIT CARD ASSY, HF 1... ... .. .. .......................................... PLG39 115 092 HOUSING PLUG+SKTS, (SERVICE KIT) 2........ .... ............................
  • 19 080 509 GROMMET, SCR NO 8/10 PANEL HOLE .312 SQ .375 HIGH 9... .......... .. ............
  • 20 213 074 CABLE, LEM 23 IN 1... .......... .. .................................................
  • 21 HD1 182 918 TRANSDUCER,CURRENT 400A MODULE SUPPLY V +/− 15V 1... ... .. .. .........
  • 22 213 055 BASE, 1... .......... .. .............................................................
  • 23 Figure 15-2 PANEL, FRONT W/CMPNTS 1... ....... .. ......................................... 215 120 CONNECTION KIT, DINSE 1................ .. ..........................................
  • 24 C6,C7 222 752 CAPACITOR ASSY, 1... .. . .. .................................................
  • 25 Figure 15-6 WINDTUNNEL, LEFT HAND W/COMPONENTS 1... ....... .. ........................
  • 26 057 357 BUSHING,SNAP−IN NYL .937 ID X 1.125 MTG HOLE 1... .......... .. ..................
  • 27 215 402 PANEL, TOP WINDTUNNEL 1... .......... .. .........................................
  • 28 PC8 233 142 CIRCUIT CARD ASSY, CLAMP (DYNASTY ONLY) 1... ... .. .. ..................... PLG24 163 467 HOUSING PLUG+SKTS, (SERVICE KIT) 1........ .. ..............................
  • PLG33 201 665 HOUSING PLUG+SKTS, (SERVICE KIT) 1........ .. ..............................
  • PLG34 148 439 HOUSING PLUG PINS+SKTS, (SERVICE KIT) 1........ .. ........................
  • 29 PC5 247 125 CIRCUIT CARD ASSY, AUX POWER W/PROGRAM 1... ... .. .. .................... PLG19 131 052 HOUSING RCPT+SKTS, (SERVICE KIT) 1........ .. ..............................
  • PLG21 115 091 HOUSING PLUG+SKTS, (SERVICE KIT) 1........ .. ..............................
  • PLG22 131 054 HOUSING RCPT+SKTS, (SERVICE KIT) 1........ .. ..............................
  • PLG23 115 093 HOUSING PLUG+SKTS, (SERVICE KIT) 1........ .. ..............................
  • 30 226 878 BRACKET, HARNESS SUPPORT (MAXSTAR 700) 1... .......... .. .....................
  • 31 195 666 SCREW, 010−32X .50 TORX PANHD W/GNDRNG STL PLD 2... .......... .. ............
  • 32 213 248 LUG, UNIV W/SCREW 2/0−14 WIRE .266STD 1... .......... .. .........................
  • Page 104

  • 33 F8, F9 131 447 CORE, TOROIDAL 1.332 ID X 1.932 OD X .625 THK 2... .. .. ...................
  • 34 235496 CABLE TIE, 0.06−2.000 BUNDLE DIA TREE STYLE PUSH MOUNT... .......... .. MTG HOLE DIA .246−.276 1........................... ...........................................
  • +When ordering a component originally displaying a precautionary label, the label should also be ordered.

    To maintain the factory original performance of your equipment, use only Manufacturer’s Suggested Replacement Parts. Model and serial number required when ordering parts from your local distributor.

  • 11
  • 12 13
  • not available unless listed.

    10

    9

    8

    14

    6 7

    15

    16

    17

    18

    19

    1

    4

    Page 105

    3

    2

    20

    804 758-B5

    ############### Figure 15-2. Panel, Front w/Components

    Item No.

    Dia. Mkgs.

    Part No.

    Description

    Quantity

    213 339

    Figure 15-2. Panel, Front w/Components

  • 1 213 053 PANEL, LOUVER COVER (ORDER SERIAL NO. CARD ALSO) 1... .......... .. ..........
  • 2 202 553 RECEPTACLE,TWIST LOCK BRASS POWER (FEMALE) 2... .......... .. ...............
  • 3 186 228 O−RING, 0.739 ID X 0.070 H 2... .......... .. ........................................
  • 4 185 712 INSULATOR, BULKHEAD FRONT 2... .......... .. ....................................
  • 5 231 279 FITTING, GAS−CLIP MOUNT 1... .......... .. .......................................
  • 6 213 051 PANEL, FRONT TOP 1... .......... .. ...............................................
  • 7 233 115 PLATE, INDICATOR FRONT − DYNASTY 350 1... .......... .. .........................
  • 7 233 116 PLATE, INDICATOR FRONT − MAXSTAR 350 1... .......... .. .........................
  • 8 228 546 KNOB, POINTER 1.250 DIA X 6MM ID W/SPRING CLIP− 4.5MM FLAT 1... .......... .....
  • 9 242 388 BUSHING, FLG 375−32X.511 1... .......... .. ........................................
  • 10 233 114 PANEL, FRONT 1... .......... .. ....................................................
  • 11 226 868 NAMEPLATE/SWITCH MEMBRANE, DYNASTY 350/700 STH/FF 1... .......... .. ........
  • Page 106

  • 11 226 869 NAMEPLATE/SWITCH MEMBRANE, MAXSTAR 350/700 STH/FF 1... .......... .. ........
  • 12 PC6 241 061 CIRCUIT CARD ASSY, CONTROL&INTERFACE W/PROGRAM 1... ... .. .. ......... PLG2 203 800 HOUSING PLUG+SKTS, (SERVICE KIT) 1........ . .. .............................. PLG4 131 056 HOUSING RCPT+SKTS, (SERVICE KIT) 1........ . .. ..............................
  • PLG6 115 092 HOUSING PLUG+SKTS, (SERVICE KIT) 1........ . .. ..............................
  • PLG7 115 094 HOUSING PLUG+SKTS, (SERVICE KIT) (Dynasty 350) 1........ . .. .................
  • 13 RC1 213 327 RECEPTACLE, W/LEADS & PLUG 14PIN 1... ... .. .. .............................
  • 14 185 717 NUT, M20−1.5 1.00HEX .19H BRS LOCKING 2... .......... .. ..........................
  • 15 178 548 TERMINAL, CONNECTOR FRICTION 1... .......... .. ................................
  • 16 229 338 WASHER, DOMED LOAD .812 ID X 1.450 OD X .070 THK 2... .......... .. ..............
  • 17 185 713 INSULATOR, BULKHEAD REAR 2... .......... .. .....................................
  • 18 185 718 O−RING, 0.989 ID X 0.070 H 2... .......... .. ........................................
  • 19 230 155 BRACKET, VALVE MTG 1... .......... .. ............................................
  • 20 FMT 213 072 FAN, MUFFIN 1... ... . .. ......................................................
  • 11

    not available unless listed.

    10

    9

    8

    7

  • 4
  • 5
  • 6
  • 3

    Page 107

  • 2
  • 13

    1

    ############### Figure 15-3. Panel, Rear w/Components

    12

    804 759-A

    Item No.

    Dia. Mkgs.

    Part No.

    Description

    Quantity

    215 128

    Figure 15-3. Panel, Rear w/Components

  • 1 +215 129 PANEL, REAR 1... ......... .. ......................................................
  • 2 216 880 CABLE, POWER 1... .......... .. ...................................................
  • 2 246 180 CABLE, POWER (CE) 1... .......... .. ..............................................
  • 3 182 445 NUT 1... .......... .. ..............................................................
  • 4 GS1 238 805 VALVE, 24VDC 2WAY,125 PSI CUSTOM PORT.054 ORF W/FR 1... ... .. .. ..........
  • 5 CB1 183 492 SUPPLEMENTARY PROTECTOR, MAN RESET 1P 10A 250V FRIC 1... ... .. .. .....
  • 6 RC2 189 033 RCPT, STR DX GND 2P3W 15A 125V (GRAY) 1... ... .. .. .........................
  • 7 115 516 RIVET, AL .187 DIA X .063−.125 GRIP BLK BLIND DOME 1... .......... .. ...............
  • 8 215 980 BUSHING,STRAIN RELIEF .709/.984 ID X1.375 MTG HOLE 1... .......... .. ............
  • 9 137 761 NUT, 750 NPT 1.31HEX .27H NYL BLK 1... .......... .. ................................
  • Page 108

  • 10 215 117 NAMEPLATE, IDENT REAR 1... .......... .. .........................................
  • 11 217 297 COVER, RECEPTACLE WEATHERPROOF DUPLEX RCPT 1... .......... .. .............
  • 12 217 480 LABEL, WARNING CORRECT CONNECTIONS 1... .......... .. .......................
  • 12 219 842 LABEL, WARNING INPUT CONNECTIONS/ELECTRIC SHOCK (CE) 1... .......... ......
  • 13 S1 244 920 SWITCH, TGL 3PST 40A 600VAC SCR TERM WIDE TGL 1... .... .. .. ..............
  • not available unless listed.

    2

    1

    11 3

    4

    5

    6

    7

    8

    14

    15 13

    5

    12

    9 10

    804 134-B

    Page 109

    ############### Figure 15-4. Wind Tunnel, Right Hand w/Components

    Item No.

    Dia. Mkgs.

    Part No.

    Description

    Quantity

    231 262

    Figure 15-4. Wind Tunnel, Right Hand w/Components

  • 1 L1 231 244 INDUCTOR, INPUT 1... .... .. .. .................................................
  • 2 T3 242 782 XFMR, HF COUPLING 1... .... .. .. ..............................................
  • 3 +212 489 PANEL, RIGHT WINDTUNNEL 1... ......... .. .......................................
  • 4 195 666 SCREW, 010−32X .50 TORX PANHD WGNDRNG STL PLD 3... .......... .. .............
  • 5 216 861 STAND−OFF, CAPACITOR 2... .......... .. ..........................................
  • 6 170 647 BUSHING, SNAP−IN NYL 1.312 ID X 1.500 MTG HOLE 1... .......... .. .................
  • 7 216 860 GROMMET, CAPACITOR 2... .......... .. ............................................
  • 8 C4,C20 217 941 CAPACITOR, ELCTLT 1800 UF 500 VDC CAN 2.52 DIA 2... .. .. .................
  • 9 207 418 SCREW, K40X 20 PAN HD−PHL STL PLD PT THREAD FORMING 2... .......... .. .......
  • 10 C3 216 700 CAPACITOR, POLYP MET FILM 16. UF 400 VAC 10% 1... .... .. .. ..................
  • 11 218 004 LABEL, WARNING ELECTRIC SHOCK/EXPLODING PARTS 1... .......... .. ............
  • 11 219 844 LABEL, WARNING ELECTRIC SHOCK/EXPLODING PARTS−WDLES (CE) 1... .......... ..
  • 12 010 493 BUSHING, SNAP−IN NYL .625 ID X .875 MTG HOLE 1... .......... .. ...................
  • 13 218 566 GASKET, INDUCTOR MOUNTING 1... .......... .. ....................................
  • 14 L2 213 348 COIL, INDUCTOR (PRE−REGULATOR) 1... .... .. .. ...............................
  • 15 138 253 SCREW, 250−20X .37 HEXWHD.52D STL PLD LKG SERR 2... .......... .. ..............
  • 1

    2

    Page 110

    3

    4

    5

    Hardware is common and not available unless listed.

    6

    8

    ############### Figure 15-5. Heat Sink, Primary Assembly

    804 135-C

    Item No.

    Dia. Mkgs.

    Part No.

    Description

    Quantity

    219 344

    Figure 15-5. Heat Sink, Primary Assembly

  • 1 213 346 HEAT SINK, POWER MODULE 1... .......... .. ......................................
  • 2 RM1 205 751 MODULE, POWER RESISTOR W/PLUG 1... ... . .. ..............................
  • 3 207 451 SCREW, 008−32X .50 PAN HD−PHL STL PLD SEMS 3... .......... .. ...................
  • 4 RT1 213 353 THERMISTOR, NTC 30K OHM @ 25 DEG C 8IN LEAD 1... ... .. .. .................
  • 5 MOD1,2 217 625 KIT, INPUT/PRE−REGULATOR AND INVERTER MODULE 1... . .. ..............
  • 6 PC1 233 146 CIRCUIT CARD ASSY, POWER INTERCONNECT 1... ... .. .. ..................... PLG11 201 665 HOUSING PLUG+SKTS, (SERVICE KIT) 1........ . .. .............................. PLG13 131 056 HOUSING RCPT+SKTS, (SERVICE KIT) 1........ .. .............................. PLG15 164 899 HOUSING PLUG PINS+SKTS, (SERVICE KIT) 1........ .. ........................
  • Page 111

  • 8 200 565 SCREW, M 5− .8X 35 PAN HD−PHL STL PLD SEMS 4... .......... .. ....................
  • To maintain the factory original performance of your equipment, use only Manufacturer’s Suggested Replacement Parts. Model and serial number required when ordering parts from your local distributor.

    2

    12

  • 9
  • 10

    3

    1

    4

    5

    Hardware is common and not available unless listed.

    6

    11

    7

    8

    804 136-C

    ############### Figure 15-6. Wind Tunnel, Left Hand w/Components

    Dia. Mkgs.

    Part No.

    Page 112

    Item No.

    Description

    213 354

    Figure 15-6. Wind Tunnel, Left Hand w/Components Quantity

  • 1 170 647 BUSHING, SNAP−IN NYL 1.312 ID X 1.500 MTG HOLE 1... .......... .. .................
  • 2 218 004 LABEL, WARNING ELECTRIC SHOCK/EXPLODING PARTS 1... .......... .. ............
  • 2 219 844 LABEL, WARNING ELECTRIC SHOCK/EXPLODING PARTS−WDLES (CE) 1... .......... ..
  • 3 CR1 206 258 RELAY, ENCL 24VDC SPST 30A/240VAC 4PIN FLANGE MTG 1... ... .. .. ...........
  • 4 145 217 SCREW, K40X 12 PAN HD−PHL STL PLD PT THREAD FORMING 2... .......... .. .......
  • 5 +212 488 PANEL, LEFT WINDTUNNEL 1... ......... .. ........................................
  • 6 T1 213 361 XFMR, HF LITZ/LITZ W/BOOST 1... .... .. .. ......................................
  • 7 Z4 213 513 COIL, INDUCTOR (BOOST) 1... .... .. .. .........................................
  • 8 Z1 213 356 OUTPUT INDUCTOR ASSY, 1... .... .. .. .........................................
  • 9 010 493 BUSHING, SNAP−IN NYL .625 ID X .875 MTG HOLE 2... .......... .. ...................
  • 10 010 381 CONNECTOR, RECTIFIER 1... .......... .. ..........................................
  • 11 227 746 GASKET, INDUCTOR MOUNTING E55 FERRITE CORE 1... .......... .. ...............
  • 12 057 357 BUSHING, SNAP−IN NYL .937 ID X 1.125 MTG HOLE 2... .......... .. ..................
  • 1

    Hardware is common and not available unless listed.

  • 5
  • 6
  • 4

    3

    Page 113

    2

    7

    9

    10

    8

    ############### Figure 15-7. Heat Sink, Secondary − Dynasty 350

    804 137-A

    Item No.

    Dia. Mkgs.

    Part No.

    Description

    Quantity

    219 345

    Figure 15-7. Heat Sink, Secondary − Dynasty 350

  • 1 PC3 233 157 CIRCUIT CARD ASSY, COMMUTATOR CONTROL 1... ... .. .. .....................
  • PLG37 131 204 HOUSING PLUG+SKTS, (SERVICE KIT) 1........ .. ..............................
  • PLG38 115 093 HOUSING PLUG+SKTS, (SERVICE KIT) 1........ .. ..............................
  • 2 213 517 BUS BAR, OUTPUT 2... .......... .. ................................................
  • 3 216 867 BUS BAR, POSITIVE 1... .......... .. ...............................................
  • 4 PM1 − 6 213 522 KIT, IGBT (CONSISTS OF 3 IGBT’S) 2... . .. ..................................
  • 5 D1,D2 213 521 KIT, ULTRA FAST DIODE 2... .. . .. ............................................
  • 6 RT2 213 353 THERMISTOR, NTC 30K OHM @ 25 DEG C 8IN LEAD 1... ... .. .. .................
  • Page 114

  • 7 224 470 HEAT SINK, POWER MODULE 1... .......... .. ......................................
  • 8 SR1 201 530 KIT, DIODE FAST RECOVERY BRIDGE 1... ... .. .. ...............................
  • 9 216 868 BUS BAR, NEGATIVE 1... .......... .. ...............................................
  • 10 PC9 241 542 CIRCUIT CARD ASSEMBLY, DIODE SNUBBER 1... ... .. .. ........................
  • To maintain the factory original performance of your equipment, use only Manufacturer’s Suggested Replacement Parts. Model and serial number required when ordering parts from your local distributor.

    Hardware is common and not available unless listed.

    2

  • 3
  • 5

  • 4
  • 1

    7

    6

    ############### Figure 15-8. Heat Sink, Secondary − Maxstar 350

    804 177-B

    Item No.

    Dia. Mkgs.

    Part No.

    Description

    Quantity

    Page 115

    221 730

    Figure 15-8. Heat Sink, Secondary − Maxstar 350

  • 1 224 470 HEAT SINK, POWER MODULE 1... .......... .. ......................................
  • 2 D1, D2 213 521 KIT, ULTRA FAST DIODE 2... .. .. ............................................
  • 3 SR1 201 531 KIT, DIODE POWER MODULE 1... ... .. .. .......................................
  • 4 RT2 213 353 THERMISTOR, NTC 30K OHM @ 25 DEG C 8IN LEAD 1... ... .. .. .................
  • 5 PC3 241 542 CIRCUIT CARD ASSY, DIODE SNUBBER 1... ... .. .. .............................
  • 6 213 519 BUS BAR 1... .......... .. ..........................................................
  • 7 C12 233 133 CAPACITOR ASSY (CE ONLY) 1... ... .. .. .......................................
  • To maintain the factory original performance of your equipment, use only Manufacturer’s Suggested Replacement Parts. Model and serial number required when ordering parts from your local distributor.

    #### Notes

    ######## Work like a Pro!

    Pros weld and cut

    safely. Read the safety rules at the beginning of this manual.

    ###### SECTION 16 − PARTS LIST FOR 700 MODELS

    Hardware is common and not available unless listed.

    4

    5

    6

    1

    2

    3

    Page 116

    32

    26

    27

    28

    29

    37

    22

    30

    31

    37

    28

    7

    11 9

    108

    12

    13Dynasty

    15

    39

    14

    25

    Page 117

    358 36

    13 Maxstar

    37

    24Dynasty Only

    23

    18

    21

    19

    22

    21

    820

    18 19

    16

    37

    8

  • 33
  • 34
  • 24 Maxstar Only

    38 17

    Page 118

    38

    17

    3

    1

    Dynasty 700 illustrated

    ############### Figure 16-1. Main Assembly

    805 472-B

    ############### Figure 16-1. Main Assembly

  • 1 223 785 LABEL, SIDE DYNASTY 700 2... .......... .. .........................................
  • 1 223 784 LABEL, SIDE MAXSTAR 700 2... .......... .. .........................................
  • 2 213 071 INSULATOR, SIDE 2... .......... .. ..................................................
  • 3 213 057 PANEL, SIDE 2... .......... .. ......................................................
  • 4 +213 056 WRAPPER, TOP 1... ......... .. ...................................................
  • 5 203 990 LABEL, GENERAL PRECAUTIONARY STATIC 1... .......... .. .........................
  • 5 179 310 LABEL, GENERAL PRECAUTIONARY WORDLESS EMF (CE) 1... .......... .. ...........
  • 6 213 073 SEAL, LIFT EYE 1... .......... .. ....................................................
  • 7 PC8,PC18233 142 CIRCUIT CARD ASSY, CLAMP (DYNASTY 700 MODELS ONLY)2... .. ........... PLG24/PLG44 163 467 HOUSING PLUG+SKTS,(SERVICE KIT) (DYNASTY 700 MODELS ONLY) 1.... ...
  • PLG33/PLG43 201 665 HOUSING PLUG+SKTS, (SERVICE KIT) (DYNASTY 700 MODELS ONLY) 1.... ...
  • PLG34/PLG45 148 439 HOUSING PLUG PINS+SKTS, (SERVICE KIT) (DYNASTY 700 MODELS ONLY)1.... ...
  • 8 080 509 GROMMET, SCR NO 8/10 PANEL HOLE .312 SQ .375 HIGH 9... .......... .. ............
  • 9 221 708 BRACKET, MTG PC BOARD (DYNASTY 700 MODELS ONLY) 1... .......... .. ...........
  • 10 010 493 BUSHING, SNAP−IN NYL .625 ID X .875 MTG HOLE 2... .......... .. ...................
  • 11 213 058 LIFT EYE, 1... .......... .. .........................................................
  • 12 T2 213 059 XFMR, 665 115/24 18/18 220 1... .... .. .. .........................................
  • Page 119

  • 13 155 436 LABEL, GROUND/PROTECTIVE EARTH 1... .......... .. ..............................
  • 14 218 170 HOSE, NPRN BRD NO 1 X .250 ID X 25.000 1... .......... .. ...........................
  • 15 089 120 CLAMP, HOSE .375 − .450 CLP DIA SLFTTNG GREEN 2... .......... .. .................
  • 16 Figure 16-3 PANEL, REAR W/COMPONENTS 1... ....... .. ....................................
  • 17 Figure 16-5 HEAT SINK, PRIMARY ASSY 2... ....... .. ........................................
  • 18 Figure 16-4 WINDTUNNEL, RIGHT HAND W/COMPONENTS 2... ....... .. ......................
  • 19 PC7 235 476 CIRCUIT CARD ASSY, HF 1... ... .. .. ..........................................
  • PLG39 115 092 HOUSING PLUG+SKTS,(SERVICE KIT) 1........ .. ..............................

  • 20 213 055 BASE, 1... .......... .. .............................................................
  • 21 213 074 CABLE, LEM 23 IN 2... .......... .. .................................................
  • 22 HD1 182 918 TRANSDUCER,CURRENT 400A MODULE SUPPLY V +/− 15V 2... ... .. .. .........
  • 23 Figure 16-7 HEAT SINK, SECONDARY − DYNASTY 700 2... ....... .. ...........................
  • 23 Figure 16-8 HEAT SINK, SECONDARY − MAXSTAR 700 2... ....... .. ...........................
  • 24 213 248 LUG, UNIV W/SCREW 2/0−14 WIRE .266STD 1... .......... .. .........................
  • 25 PC5 247 125 CIRCUIT CARD ASSY, AUX POWER W/PROGRAM 1... ... .. .. ................... PLG19 131 052 HOUSING RCPT+SKTS, (SERVICE KIT) 1........ .. ..............................
  • PLG21 115 091 HOUSING PLUG+SKTS, (SERVICE KIT) 1........ .. ..............................
  • PLG22 131 054 HOUSING RCPT+SKTS, (SERVICE KIT) 1........ .. ..............................
  • PLG23 115 093 HOUSING PLUG+SKTS, (SERVICE KIT) 1........ .. .............................. PLG41 131 054 HOUSING RCPT+SKTS, (SERVICE KIT) 1........ .. ..............................
  • 26 215 402 PANEL, TOP WINDTUNNEL 1... .......... .. .........................................
  • 27 057 357 BUSHING,SNAP−IN NYL .937 ID X 1.125 MTG HOLE 1... .......... .. ..................
  • 28 Figure 16-6 WINDTUNNEL, LEFT HAND W/COMPONENTS 2... ....... .. ........................
  • 29 C6,C7 222 752 CAPACITOR ASSY, 1... .. . .. .................................................
  • 30 221 721 PANEL, WINDTUNNEL SEPARATOR 1... .......... .. .................................
  • 31 C8 221 707 CAPACITOR ASSY, 1... .... .. .. .................................................
  • 32 Figure 16-2 PANEL, FRONT W/CMPNTS 1... ....... .. ......................................... 215 120 CONNECTION KIT, DINSE 1................ .. ..........................................
  • 33 PC19 233 152 CIRCUIT CARD ASSY, FILTER (DYNASTY 700 ONLY) (CE) 1... .. . .. ............
  • 33 PC19 246 265 CIRCUIT CARD ASSY, FILTER (MAXSTAR 700 ONLY) (CE) 1... .. . .. ............
  • 34 222 760 BRACKET, FILTER BOARD 1... .......... .. .........................................
  • 35 226 878 BRACKET, HARNESS SUPPORT (MAXSTAR 700 ONLY) 1... .......... .. ...............
  • 36 195 666 SCREW, 010−32X .50 TORX PANHD W/GNDRNG STL PLD 2... .......... .. ............
  • Page 120

  • 37 F8, F9 131 447 CORE, TOROIDAL 1.332 ID X 1.932 OD X .625 THK... .. .. F10, F11 (DYNASTY 700 ONLY) (CE) 4...... ........... .........................................
  • ############### Figure 16-1. Main Assembly (continued)

  • 38 F8, F9 237 542 CORE, TOROIDAL .540 ID X .875 OD X .500 THK (MAXSTAR 700 ONLY) (CE) 2... .. ..
  • 39 235496 CABLE TIE, 0.06−2.000 BUNDLE DIA TREE STYLE PUSH MOUNT... .......... .. MTG HOLE DIA .246−.276 1........................... ...........................................
  • ############### +When ordering a component originally displaying a precautionary label, the label should also be ordered. To maintain the factory original performance of your equipment, use only Manufacturer’s Suggested Replacement Parts. Model and serial number required when ordering parts from your local distributor.

    2

    Hardware is common and not available unless listed.

  • 12
  • 13 14
  • 11

    10

  • 7
  • 8
  • 9
  • 15
  • 16
  • 6

    17

    Page 121

  • 18
  • 19
  • 20

    21

    1

    4

    3

    5

    1

    ############### Figure 16-2. Panel, Front w/Components

    804 138-B

    Item No.

    Dia. Mkgs.

    Part No.

    Description

    Quantity

    221 408

    Figure 16-2. Panel, Front w/Components

  • 1 213 053 PANEL, LOUVER COVER (ORDER SERIAL NO. CARD ALSO) 2... .......... .. ..........
  • Page 122

  • 2 214 826 RECEPTACLE, THREAD LOCK 2... .......... .. ......................................
  • 3 186 228 O−RING, 0.739 ID X 0.070 H 2... .......... .. ........................................
  • 4 185 712 INSULATOR, BULKHEAD FRONT 2... .......... .. ....................................
  • 5 231 279 FITTING,GAS−CLIP MOUNT 1... .......... .. ........................................
  • 6 213 051 PANEL, FRONT TOP 1... .......... .. ...............................................
  • 7 216 859 PLATE, FRONT PANEL 1... .......... .. .............................................
  • 8 233 115 PLATE, INDICATOR FRONT − DYNASTY 700 1... .......... .. .........................
  • 8 233 116 PLATE, INDICATOR FRONT − MAXSTAR 700 1... .......... .. .........................
  • Dia. Mkgs.

    Part No.

    Item No.

    Description

    Quantity

    221 408

    Figure 16-2. Panel, Front w/Components (continued)

  • 9 228 546 KNOB, POINTER 1.250 DIA X 6MM ID W/SPRING CLIP− 4.5MM FLAT 1... .......... ....
  • 10 242 388 BUSHING, FLG 375−32X.511 1... .......... .. ........................................
  • 11 233 113 PANEL, FRONT 1... .......... .. ....................................................
  • 12 226 868 NAMEPLATE/SWITCH MEMBRANE, DYNASTY 350/700 STH/FF 1... .......... .. ........
  • 12 226 869 NAMEPLATE/SWITCH MEMBRANE, MAXSTAR 350/700 STH/FF 1... .......... .. ........
  • 13 PC6 241 061 CIRCUIT CARD ASSY, CONTROL&INTERFACE W/PROGRAM 1... ... .. .. ............ PLG2 203 800 HOUSING PLUG+SKTS, (SERVICE KIT) 1........ . .. ..............................
  • PLG4 131 056 HOUSING RCPT+SKTS, (SERVICE KIT) 1........ . .. ..............................
  • PLG5 162 382 HOUSING PLUG+SKTS, (SERVICE KIT) 1........ . .. ..............................
  • PLG6 115 092 HOUSING PLUG+SKTS, (SERVICE KIT) 1........ . .. ..............................
  • PLG7 115 094 HOUSING PLUG+SKTS, (SERVICE KIT) (Dynasty 700 Models Only) 1........ . .. .....
  • Page 123

  • 14 RC1 213 327 RECEPTACLE, W/LEADS & PLUG 14PIN 1... ... .. .. .............................
  • 15 185 717 NUT, M20−1.5 1.00HEX .19H BRS LOCKING 2... .......... .. ..........................
  • 16 178 548 TERMINAL, CONNECTOR FRICTION 1... .......... .. ................................
  • 17 229 338 WASHER, DOMED LOAD .812 ID X 1.450 OD X .070 THK 2... .......... .. ..............
  • 18 185 718 O−RING, 0.989 ID X 0.070 H 2... .......... .. ........................................
  • 19 185 713 INSULATOR, BULKHEAD REAR 2... .......... .. .....................................
  • 20 230 155 BRACKET, VALVE MTG 1... .......... .. .............................................
  • 21 FMB,FMT 213 072 FAN, MUFFIN 2... .. ......................................................
  • To maintain the factory original performance of your equipment, use only Manufacturer’s Suggested Replacement Parts. Model and serial number required when ordering parts from your local distributor.

  • 2
  • 3
  • 4
  • Hardware is common and not available unless listed.

    8

    7

    6

    5

    9

    10

    1

    11

    Page 124

    804 139-A

    ############### Figure 16-3. Panel, Rear w/Components

    Dia. Mkgs.

    Part No.

    Item No.

    Description

    Quantity

    221 409

    Figure 16-3. Panel, Rear w/Components

  • 1 +213 054 PANEL, REAR 1... ......... .. ......................................................
  • 2 GS1 238805 VALVE, 24VDC 2WAY,125 PSI CUSTOM PORT.054 ORF W/FR 1... ... .. .. ..........
  • 3 CB1 183 492 SUPPLEMENTARY PROTECTOR, MAN RESET 1P 10A 250V FRIC 1... ... .. .. .....
  • 4 RC2 189 033 RCPT, STR DX GND 2P3W 15A 125V (GRAY) 1... ... .. .. .........................
  • 5 115 516 RIVET, AL .187 DIA X .063−.125 GRIP BLK BLIND DOME 1... .......... .. ...............
  • 6 010 467 CONN, CLAMP CABLE 1.250 1... .......... .. ........................................
  • 7 137 761 NUT, 750 NPT 1.31HEX .27H NYL BLK 1... .......... .. ................................
  • 8 215 117 NAMEPLATE, IDENT REAR 1... .......... .. .........................................
  • 9 217 297 COVER, RECEPTACLE WEATHERPROOF DUPLEX RCPT 1... .......... .. .............
  • 10 221 164 LABEL, WARNING ELECTRIC SHOCK/INPUT POWER CONNECT 1... .......... .. ......
  • 10 219 842 LABEL, WARNING INPUT CONNECTIONS/ELECTRIC SHOCK (CE) 1... .......... ......
  • 11 S1 246 846 SWITCH, TGL ASSY (INCLUDES) 1... .... .. .. .................................... 246 840 SWITCH, TGL 3 PST 85A 600VAC SCR TERM WIDE TGL 1................ .... ............
  • Hardware is common and not available unless listed.

    2

    1

    Page 125

    11 3

    4

    5

    6

    7

    8

    14

    15 13

    5

    12

    9 10

    804 134-B

    ############### Figure 16-4. Wind Tunnel, Right Hand w/Components

    Item No.

    Dia. Mkgs.

    Part No.

    Description

    Quantity

    213 345

    Page 126

    Figure 16-4. Wind Tunnel, Right Hand w/Components

  • 1 L1 231 244 INDUCTOR, INPUT 1... .... .. .. .................................................
  • 2 T3, T4 242 782 XFMR, COUPLING (TOP) 1... .. . .. ...........................................
  • 3 +212 489 PANEL, RIGHT WINDTUNNEL 1... ......... .. .......................................
  • 4 195 666 SCREW, 010−32X .50 TORX PANHD WGNDRNG STL PLD 3... .......... .. .............
  • 5 216 861 STAND−OFF, CAPACITOR 2... .......... .. ..........................................
  • 6 170 647 BUSHING, SNAP−IN NYL 1.312 ID X 1.500 MTG HOLE 1... .......... .. .................
  • 7 216 860 GROMMET, CAPACITOR 2... .......... .. ............................................
  • 8 C4,C20 217 941 CAPACITOR, ELCTLT 1800 UF 500 VDC CAN 2.52 DIA 2... .. .. .................
  • 9 207 418 SCREW, K40X 20 PAN HD−PHL STL PLD PT THREAD FORMING 2... .......... .. .......
  • 10 C3 216 700 CAPACITOR, POLYP MET FILM 16. UF 400 VAC 10% 1... .... .. .. ..................
  • 11 218 004 LABEL, WARNING ELECTRIC SHOCK/EXPLODING PARTS 1... .......... .. ............
  • 11 219 844 LABEL, WARNING ELECTRIC SHOCK/EXPLODING PARTS−WDLES (CE) 1... .......... ..
  • 12 010 493 BUSHING, SNAP−IN NYL .625 ID X .875 MTG HOLE 1... .......... .. ...................
  • 13 218 566 GASKET, INDUCTOR MOUNTING 1... .......... .. ....................................
  • 14 L2 213 348 COIL, INDUCTOR (PRE−REGULATOR) 1... .... .. .. ...............................
  • 15 138 253 SCREW, 250−20X .37 HEXWHD.52D STL PLD LKG SERR 2... .......... .. ..............
  • 1

    2

    3

    4

    5

    Hardware is common and not available unless listed.

    6

    8

    804 135-C

    Page 127

    ############### Figure 16-5. Heat Sink, Primary Assembly

    Dia. Mkgs.

    Part No.

    Item No.

    Description

    Quantity

    219 344

    Figure 16-5. Heat Sink, Primary Assembly

    1 213 346 HEAT SINK, POWER MODULE 1... .......... .. ...................................... 2 RM1 205 751 MODULE, POWER RESISTOR W/PLUG 1... ... . .. .............................. 3 207 451 SCREW, 008−32X .50 PAN HD−PHL STL PLD SEMS 3... .......... .. ................... 4 RT1,RT3 213 353 THERMISTOR, NTC 30K OHM @ 25 DEG C 8IN LEAD 1... . .. ................. 5 MOD1,2 217 625 KIT, INPUT/PRE−REGULATOR AND INVERTER MODULE 1... . .. .............. 6 PC1,PC2 233 146 CIRCUIT CARD ASSY, POWER INTERCONNECT 1... . .. ..................... PLG11 210 050 HOUSING PLUG+SKTS, (SERVICE KIT) 1........ . .. .............................. PLG13 131 056 HOUSING RCPT+SKTS, (SERVICE KIT) 1........ .. .............................. PLG15 164 899 HOUSING PLUG PINS+SKTS, (SERVICE KIT) 1........ .. .........................

  • PLG26 158 719 HOUSING PLUG+SKTS, (SERVICE KIT) 1........ .. ..............................
  • PLG27 131 056 HOUSING RCPT+SKTS, (SERVICE KIT) 1........ .. .............................. PLG46 210 050 HOUSING PLUG+SKTS, (SERVICE KIT) (DYNASTY 700 MODELS ONLY) 1........ ..
  • 8 200 565 SCREW, M 5− .8X 35 PAN HD−PHL STL PLD SEMS 4... .......... .. ....................
  • 2

    12

  • 9
  • 10

    3

    1

    Page 128

    4

    5

    Hardware is common and not available unless listed.

    6

    11

    7

    8

    804 136-C

    ############### Figure 16-6. Wind Tunnel, Left Hand w/Components

    Dia. Mkgs.

    Part No.

    Item No.

    Description

    213 354

    Figure 16-6. Wind Tunnel, Left Hand w/Components Quantity

    1 170 647 BUSHING, SNAP−IN NYL 1.312 ID X 1.500 MTG HOLE 1... .......... .. ................. 2 218 004 LABEL, WARNING ELECTRIC SHOCK/EXPLODING PARTS 1... .......... .. ............

  • 2 219 844 LABEL, WARNING ELECTRIC SHOCK/EXPLODING PARTS (CE) 1... .......... .. ........
  • 3 CR1 206 258 RELAY, ENCL 24VDC SPST 30A/240VAC 4PIN FLANGE MTG 1... ... .. .. ...........
  • 4 145 217 SCREW, K40X 12 PAN HD−PHL STL PLD PT THREAD FORMING 2... .......... .. .......
  • 5 +212 488 PANEL, LEFT WINDTUNNEL 1... ......... .. ........................................
  • 6 T1 213 361 XFMR, HF LITZ/LITZ W/BOOST 1... .... .. .. ......................................
  • 7 Z4 213 513 COIL, INDUCTOR (BOOST) 1... .... .. .. .........................................
  • 8 Z1 213 356 OUTPUT INDUCTOR ASSY, 1... .... .. .. .........................................
  • Page 129

  • 9 010 493 BUSHING, SNAP−IN NYL .625 ID X .875 MTG HOLE 2... .......... .. ...................
  • 10 010 381 CONNECTOR, RECTIFIER 1... .......... .. ..........................................
  • 11 227 746 GASKET, INDUCTOR MOUNTING E55 FERRITE CORE 1... .......... .. ...............
  • 12 057 357 BUSHING, SNAP−IN NYL .937 ID X 1.125 MTG HOLE 2... .......... .. ..................
  • 1

    Hardware is common and not available unless listed.

  • 5
  • 6
  • 4

    3

    2

    7

    9

    10

    8

    ############### Figure 16-7. Heat Sink, Secondary − Dynasty 700

    804 137-A

    Item No.

    Dia. Mkgs.

    Part No.

    Page 130

    Description

    Quantity

    219 345

    Figure 16-7. Heat Sink, Secondary − Dynasty 700

    1 PC3,PC4 233 157 CIRCUIT CARD ASSY, COMMUTATOR CONTROL 2... . .. .................... PLG32/PLG38115 093 CIRCUIT CARD ASSY, COMMUTATOR CONTROL 1..... .. ..................... PLG31/PLG37131 024 CIRCUIT CARD ASSY, COMMUTATOR CONTROL 1..... .. ..................... 2 213 517 BUS BAR, OUTPUT 2... .......... .. ................................................ 3 216 867 BUS BAR, POSITIVE 1... .......... .. ............................................... 4 PM1 − 6 213 522 KIT, IGBT (CONSISTS OF 3 IGBT’S) 2... . .. .................................. 5 D1,D2 213 521 KIT, ULTRA FAST DIODE 2... .. . .. ............................................ 6 RT2,RT4 213 353 THERMISTOR, NTC 30K OHM @ 25 DEG C 8IN LEAD 1... . .. ................. 7 224 470 HEAT SINK, POWER MODULE 1... .......... .. ...................................... 8 SR1 201 530 KIT, DIODE FAST RECOVERY BRIDGE 1... ... .. .. ............................... 9 216 868 BUS BAR, NEGATIVE 1... .......... .. ............................................... 10 PC9 241 542 CIRCUIT CARD ASSEMBLY, DIODE SNUBBER 1... ... .. .. .......................

    To maintain the factory original performance of your equipment, use only Manufacturer’s Suggested Replacement Parts. Model and serial number required when ordering parts from your local distributor.

    Hardware is common and not available unless listed.

    3

    1

    2

    54

    7

    6

    ############### Figure 16-8. Heat Sink, Secondary − Maxstar 700

    804 177-B

    Item No.

    Dia. Mkgs.

    Part No.

    Description

    Quantity

    Page 131

    221 730

    Figure 16-8. Heat Sink, Secondary − Maxstar 700

  • 1 224 470 HEAT SINK, POWER MODULE 1... .......... .. ......................................
  • 2 D1, D2 213 521 KIT, ULTRA FAST DIODE 2... .. .. ............................................
  • 3 SR1 201 531 KIT, DIODE POWER MODULE 1... ... .. .. .......................................
  • 4 RT2, RT4 213 353 THERMISTOR, NTC 30K OHM @ 25 DEG C 8IN LEAD 1... . .. .................
  • 5 PC3 241 542 CIRCUIT CARD ASSY, DIODE SNUBBER 1... ... .. .. ............................
  • 6 213 519 BUS BAR 1... .......... .. ..........................................................
  • 7 C9, C10 221 707 CAPACITOR ASSY (CE ONLY) 1... . .. .......................................
  • To maintain the factory original performance of your equipment, use only Manufacturer’s Suggested Replacement Parts. Model and serial number required when ordering parts from your local distributor.

    ###### SECTION 17 − PARTS LIST FOR COOLER

    Hardware is common and not available unless listed.

  • 4
  • 9

  • 6
  • 10
  • 11
  • 7
  • 8
  • 5
  • Page 132

    17

  • 1
  • 2
  • 3

    15

    14

    16

    13

    12

    1819

    20

    35 34

    14

    29

    21

    22

    33

    32

    1423

    Page 133

    24 25

    31

  • 26
  • 27
  • 30

    28

    ############### Figure 17-1. Main Assembly

    804 813-B

    Item No.

    Dia. Mkgs.

    Part No.

    Description

    Quantity

    Figure 17-1. Main Assembly

  • 1 228 551 Plug, W/Leads Fan 1... .......... .. ..................................................
  • 2 219 178 Label, Caution Incorrect Coolant 1... .......... .. ......................................
  • 3 +226 965 Panel, Side RH 1... ......... .. .....................................................
  • 4 228 519 Hose, nprn brd no 1 X .250 ID X .455 OD X 9.000 1... .......... .. ......................
  • 5 228 508 Pump, Coolant W/Fittings (Includes) 1... .......... .. ...................................
  • 6 5523 Ftg, Hose Brs Barbed Elbow M 3/8 TBG X 3/8 NPT 2... ............. .... ...................
  • 7 173 999 Pump, Coolant 100 GPH W/V-Band CW Rotation 1... .......... .... .....................
  • 8 134 795 Coupler, Drive Pump 1... .......... .... ..............................................
  • 9 196 990 Ftg, Brs Barbed 1... .......... .... ..................................................
  • 10 173 263 Motor, 1/4hp 115vac 50/60 Hz 1425/1725 RPM Dual 1... .......... .. .....................
  • Page 134

  • 11 226 966 Bracket, Motor Mount 1... .......... .. ...............................................
  • 12 166 608 Cap, Tank Screw−on W/Vent 1... .......... .. .........................................
  • 13 226 932 Tank, Coolant (Includes) 1... .......... .. ............................................. 231 286 Ftg, Hose Brs Elbow Barbed M 3/8 TBG X M 3/8 TBG 2................ .... ................ 231 284 Bushing, Tank Coolant 2................ .... ............................................. 228 518 Tubing, PVC .375 ID X .500 OD X 6.125 Blk Angle 1................ .... ................... 231 285 Tubing, PVC .375 ID X .500 OD X 1.000 Blk 1................ .... ........................
  • 14 228 529 Hose, .375 ID X .650 OD X 19.500 3... .......... .. ...................................
  • 15 155 436 Label, Ground/Protective Earth 1... .......... .. .......................................
  • 16 163 562 Light, Ind Wht Lens 125VAC Snap−in Neon Non−relampa 1... .......... .. ................
  • 17 213 053 Panel, Louver Cover 1... .......... .. ................................................
  • 18 230 151 Plate, Indicator Front Cooler 1... .......... .. ..........................................
  • 19 226 940 Valve, Check Bidirectional Assy 2... .......... .. .......................................
  • 20 230 155 Backet, Valve Mounting 2... .......... .. ..............................................
  • 21 226 964 Panel, Side Lh 1... .......... .. ......................................................
  • 22 226 931 Base, Cooler 1... .......... .. .......................................................
  • 23 232 424 Radiator, Heat Exchanger 1... .......... .. ............................................
  • 24 231 341 Plenum, Air 1... .......... .. ........................................................
  • 25 213 072 Fan, Muffin 1... .......... .. .........................................................
  • 26 204 369 Cable, Power 5 Ft 16ga 3c 1... .......... .. ...........................................
  • 27 228 498 Panel, Rear 1... .......... .. ........................................................
  • 28 196 312 Guard, Fan 1... .......... .. ........................................................
  • 29 228 520 Filter, Assy W/Fittings (Includes) 1... .......... .. ......................................
  • 30 215 667 Filter 1... .......... .... ............................................................
  • 31 228 532 Hose, .375 ID X .650 OD X 1.415 2... .......... .... ..................................
  • 32 231 286 Ftg, Hose Brs Elbow Barbed M 3/8 TBG X M 3/8 TBG 2... .......... .... .................
  • 33 226 967 Bracket, Mtg Filter 1... .......... .... .................................................
  • 34 236 084 Hose, .375 ID X .650 OD X 10.500 1... .......... .... .................................
  • 35 228 530 Hose, .375 ID X .650 OD X 8.375 1... .......... .... ..................................
  • ############### +When ordering a component originally displaying a precautionary label, the label should also be ordered. To maintain the factory original performance of your equipment, use only Manufacturer’s Suggested Replacement Parts. Model and serial number required when ordering parts from your local distributor.

    ###### SECTION 18 − PARTS LIST FOR CART

    Hardware is common and not available unless listed.

    3

    4

    2

    Page 135

  • 5
  • 6
  • 7

    1

    8

    9 10

    11 12

    11

    13

    18

    15 14

    1617

    ############### Figure 18-1. Main Assembly

    804 812-A

    Dia. Mkgs.

    Part No.

    Item No.

    Description

    Quantity

    Page 136

    Figure 18-1 Complete Cart Assembly.

    230 157

  • 1 226 927 Handle, Cart 1... ............. .... ..................................................
  • 2 +226 929 Panel, Side Rail LH 1... ............ .... ............................................
  • 3 210 224 Chain, Straight Link 1/0 X 27 Bright Zinc Pld 1... ............. .... .....................
  • 4 226 926 Support, Bottle 1... ............. .... ................................................
  • 5 192 236 Label, Caution Over Turning Can Cause Injury 2... ............. .... .....................
  • 6 +226 930 Panel, Side Rail RH 1... ............ .... ............................................
  • 7 199 403 Holder, Foot Control 1... ............. .... ...........................................
  • 8 191 875 Hanger, Cable/Torch 3... ............. .... .........................................
  • 9 226 919 Base, Cart 1... ............. .... ....................................................
  • 10 226 920 Tray, Bottle Assy 1... ............. .... ..............................................
  • 11 602 250 Washer, Flat .812 ID x 1.469 OD x .134t Stl Pld Ansi .750 8... ............. .... ..........
  • 12 209 869 Wheel, Poly−olefin 10 In Diax 2.000 wide x .750 2... ............. .... ...................
  • 13 121 614 Ring, Rtng Ext .750 Shaft X .085 Thk E Style Pld 2... ............. .... ..................
  • 14 226 925 Support, Base Drawer Slides 1... ............. .... ....................................
  • 15 226 923 Caster, Swvl 4.00 In Polyolefin 2... ............. .... ..................................
  • 16 216 594 Slide, Drawer Full Extension 2... ............. .... ....................................
  • 17 191 884 Drawer, 1... ............. .... ......................................................
  • 18 228 585 Base, Front Panel 1... ............. .... .............................................
  • To maintain the factory original performance of your equipment, use only Manufacturer’s Suggested Replacement Parts. Model and serial number required when ordering parts from your local distributor.

    +When ordering a component originally displaying a precautionary label, the label should also be ordered.

    |Warranty Questions?

    Call 1-800-4-A-MILLER for your local Miller distributor.

    ![image 69](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile69.png)

    ![image 70](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile70.png)

    Your distributor also gives you ...

    Service You always get the fast, reliable response you need. Most replacement parts can be in your hands in 24 hours.

    Support Need fast answers to the tough welding questions? Contact your distributor. The expertise of the distributor and Miller is there to help you, every step of the way.| |---|

    Effective January 1, 2010 (Equipment with a serial number preface of MA or newer)

    This limited warranty supersedes all previous Miller warranties and is exclusive with no other guarantees or warranties expressed or implied.

  • 90 Days — Parts
  • LIMITED WARRANTY − Subject to the terms and conditions below, Miller Electric Mfg. Co., Appleton, Wisconsin, warrants to its original retail purchaser that new Miller equipment sold after the effective date of this limited warranty is free of defects in material and workmanship at the time it is shipped by Miller. THIS WARRANTY IS EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS.

  • * Accessory (Kits)
  • * Canvas Covers
  • * Induction Heating Coils and Blankets, Cables, and Non-Electronic Controls
  • * M-Guns
  • * MIG Guns and Subarc (SAW) Guns
  • * Remote Controls and RFCS-RJ45
  • * Replacement Parts (No labor)
  • * Roughneck Guns
  • * Spoolmate Spoolguns
  • Within the warranty periods listed below, Miller will repair or replace any warranted parts or components that fail due to such defects in material or workmanship. Miller must be notified in writing within thirty (30) days of such defect or failure, at which time Miller will provide instructions on the warranty claim procedures to be followed.

    Miller’s True Blue Limited Warranty shall not apply to:

  • 1. Consumable components; such as contact tips, cutting nozzles, contactors, brushes, relays, work station table tops and welding curtains, or parts that fail due to normal wear. (Exception: brushes and relays are covered on all engine-driven products.)
  • 2. Items furnished by Miller, but manufactured by others, such as engines or trade accessories. These items are covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, if any.
  • 3. Equipment that has been modified by any party other than Miller, or equipment that has been improperly installed, improperly operated or misused based upon industry standards, or equipment which has not had reasonable and necessary maintenance, or equipment which has been used for operation outside of the specifications for the equipment.
  • Miller shall honor warranty claims on warranted equipment listed below in the event of such a failure within the warranty time periods. All warranty time periods start on the delivery date of the equipment to the original end-user purchaser, and not to exceed one year after the equipment is shipped to a North American distributor or eighteen months after the equipment is shipped to an International distributor.

  • 1. 5 Years Parts — 3 Years Labor
  • Original main power rectifiers only to include SCRs, diodes, and discrete rectifier modules
  • 2. 3 Years — Parts and Labor
  • * Engine Driven Welding Generators (NOTE: Engines are warranted separately by the engine manufacturer.)
  • * Inverter Power Sources (Unless Otherwise Stated)
  • * Plasma Arc Cutting Power Sources
  • * Process Controllers
  • * Semi-Automatic and Automatic Wire Feeders
  • * Smith 30 Series Flowgauge and Flowmeter Regulators (No Labor)
  • * Transformer/Rectifier Power Sources
  • * Water Coolant Systems (Integrated)
  • 3. 2 Years — Parts
  • Auto-Darkening Helmet Lenses (No Labor)
  • 4. 1 Year — Parts and Labor Unless Specified
  • * Automatic Motion Devices
  • * CoolBelt and CoolBand Blower Unit (No Labor)
  • * External Monitoring Equipment and Sensors
  • * Field Options (NOTE: Field options are covered for the remaining warranty period of the product they are installed in, or for a minimum of one year — whichever is greater.)
  • * Flowgauge and Flowmeter Regulators (No Labor)
  • * RFCS Foot Controls (Except RFCS-RJ45)
  • * Fume Extractors
  • * HF Units
  • * ICE Plasma Cutting Torches (No Labor)
  • * Induction Heating Power Sources, Coolers, and Electronic Controls/Recorders
  • * Load Banks
  • * Motor Driven Guns (w/exception of Spoolmate Spoolguns)
  • * PAPR Blower Unit (No Labor)
  • * Positioners and Controllers
  • * Racks
  • * Running Gear/Trailers
  • * Spot Welders
  • * Subarc Wire Drive Assemblies
  • * Water Coolant Systems (Non-Integrated)
  • * Weldcraft-Branded TIG Torches (No Labor)
  • * Work Stations/Weld Tables (No Labor)
  • 5. 6 Months — Parts
  • MILLER PRODUCTS ARE INTENDED FOR PURCHASE AND USE BY COMMERCIAL/INDUSTRIAL USERS AND PERSONS TRAINED AND EXPERIENCED IN THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF WELDING EQUIPMENT.

    In the event of a warranty claim covered by this warranty, the exclusive remedies shall be, at Miller’s option: (1) repair; or (2) replacement; or, where authorized in writing by Miller in appropriate cases, (3) the reasonable cost of repair or replacement at an authorized Miller service station; or (4) payment of or credit for the purchase price (less reasonable depreciation based upon actual use) upon return of the goods at customer’s risk and expense. Miller’s option of repair or replacement will be F.O.B., Factory at Appleton, Wisconsin, or F.O.B. at a Miller authorized service facility as determined by Miller. Therefore no compensation or reimbursement for transportation costs of any kind will be allowed.

    TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. IN NO EVENT SHALL MILLER BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING LOSS OF PROFIT), WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY.

    ANY EXPRESS WARRANTY NOT PROVIDED HEREIN AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY, GUARANTY OR REPRESENTATION AS TO PERFORMANCE, AND ANY REMEDY FOR BREACH OF CONTRACT TORT OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY WHICH, BUT FOR THIS PROVISION, MIGHT ARISE BY IMPLICATION, OPERATION OF LAW, CUSTOM OF TRADE OR COURSE OF DEALING, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH RESPECT TO ANY AND ALL EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY MILLER IS EXCLUDED AND DISCLAIMED BY MILLER.

    Some states in the U.S.A. do not allow limitations of how long an implied warranty lasts, or the exclusion of incidental, indirect, special or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you. This warranty provides specific legal rights, and other rights may be available, but may vary from state to state.

    In Canada, legislation in some provinces provides for certain additional warranties or remedies other than as stated herein, and to the extent that they may not be waived, the limitations and exclusions set out above may not apply. This Limited Warranty provides specific legal rights, and other rights may be available, but may vary from province to province.

  • * Batteries
  • * Bernard Guns (No Labor)
  • * Tregaskiss Guns (No Labor)
  • miller_warr 2010−01

    #### Owner’s Record

    Please complete and retain with your personal records.

    ################ Model Name Serial/Style Number

    Purchase Date (Date which equipment was delivered to original customer.)

    Distributor

    Address

    City

    State Zip

    #### For Service

    ########### Contact a DISTRIBUTOR or SERVICE AGENCY near you.

    Always provide Model Name and Serial/Style Number.

    Contact your Distributor for:

    Welding Supplies and Consumables Options and Accessories Personal Safety Equipment Service and Repair Replacement Parts Training (Schools, Videos, Books) Technical Manuals (Servicing Information and Parts) Circuit Diagrams Welding Process Handbooks

    To locate a Distributor or Service Agency visit www.millerwelds.com or call 1-800-4-A-Miller

    Contact the Delivering Carrier to:

    File a claim for loss or damage during shipment.

    For assistance in filing or settling claims, contact your distributor and/or equipment manufacturer’s Transportation Department.

    ORIGINAL INSTRUCTIONS − PRINTED IN USA  2010 Miller Electric Mfg. Co. 2010−01

    |Miller Electric Mfg. Co. An Illinois Tool Works Company 1635 West Spencer Street Appleton, WI 54914 USA

    International Headquarters−USA USA Phone: 920-735-4505 Auto-Attended USA & Canada FAX: 920-735-4134 International FAX: 920-735-4125

    For International Locations Visit www.MillerWelds.com

    ![image 71](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile71.png)

    ![image 72](o216869u_mil_images/imageFile72.png)| |---|

    More from Miller